Addendum
Stantec Architecture Inc. 311 Summer Street, Boston MA 02210-1723 Phone:(617) 234-3100 Fax: (617) 661-7118
Project Number : CF-RW-330 Addendum No. : Addendum #4 Date: March 27, 2018 Owner : CT DAS Division of Construction Services Project Name: ECSU Shafer Hall Renovation
This addendum is to be read with and constitutes part of the bid documents.
INSTRUCTIONS:
This addendum modifies and supersedes the Revised Drawing Set dated 09 February 2018 and the Project Manual’s specifications from the CD – 100% Bid Set dated 20 December 2017. All other provisions of the Contract Documents not modified by this addendum remain in effect.
DETAILS OF ADDENDUM:
1. Drawings: See attached drawing index on G-001 for the list of revised sheets.
2. Project Manual: The following sections listed below have been amended.
A. Revise Section 08 45 23 Translucent Wall Panel as follows:
i. 1.2, A, 1: Remove “insulated with aerogel”
ii. 1.5E: Remove section
iii. 1.7, B, 3: Add section, “Fiberbloom: 20 years from date of substantial completion”
iv. 2.3A: Remove reference to ICBO ES AC04 and replace with the current standard, ICC ES AC 177. v. 2.3, A, 3: Revise heading to read, “Interior Face-Sheet”
vi. 2.3C: Revise section to read, "Thermally-Broken extruded aluminum I-Beams, with a minimum flange width of 7/16."
vii. 2.3E: Remove section
B. Revise Section 08 51 10 Aluminum Windows, as follows;
i. 2.3D. Awning Window Hardware
1. Hardware requirements: provide hardware that complies with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2
ke \\us1297-f01\shared_projects\218420742\data\i_record_documents\i05_addendaset\addenda_4_2018.03.27\individual_files\00_specs\ecsu-shafer_addendum-4_narrative.docx Addendum No. 4, March 29, 2018 March 27, 2018 CF-RW-330 Page 2 of 4
2. Hardware for awning windows:
a. Latches: multi-point locking device with concealed keepers, minimum 2 per sash, white bronze
b. Hinges: Four-bar stainless steel concealed hinges
c. Limit Device: 4 inches, non-releasable, stainless steel
d. Opening Device: Die cast dual-arm Roto operator in manufacturer’s standard white bronze
ii. 2.3E. Insect Screens
1. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Provide for each operable ventilator.
2. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames; Manufacturer’s standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. Finish to match aluminum windows
3. Stainless-Steel Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.009-inch-diamtere, nonmagnetic stainless-steel wire, Type 304 or 316, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VI.
iii. 2.5 SECURITY SCREENS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Avant Guard Inc. 2. Hope’s windows Inc 3. Kane Innovations, (formerly Kane Manufacturing)
Basis of Design; Kane Innovations – Level 4 Fixed Aluminum Protector Security Screens, Interior mounted
B. Aluminum Main Frame - The main frame shall be not less than 1” [25.4mm] x 1-1/2” [38.1mm] wide, “L” shape and extruded from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. Weight shall be not less than .422 lbs./ft., with a nominal thickness of .075-inch. The corners of the main frame shall be mitered, fitted with an internal tension coupling assembly and fastened. The screen frame shall have an integral groove for the retention of a combination cushioning strip/insect shield.
C. Finish – shall match color and gloss of the interior windows – UC106694F – Duranar Dark Mica
D. Wire Cloth Infill: Wire cloth shall be woven 12-mesh to the inch from .028 [0.71] inch diameter Type 304 stainless steel wire and double crimped. Wire cloth shall be hemmed 180 degrees and retained by a removable concealment plate and square drive TEK screws.
E. Attachment to Window Frame: Tamper resistant fasteners shall be used for all components – coordinated with the window frame assembly and window manufacturer
C. Revise Section 09 30 00 Tiling as follows:
i. 2.1, I., 1 to read as follows:
Addendum No. 4, March 29, 2018 March 27, 2018 CF-RW-330 Page 3 of 4
1. Locations: All bathroom and shower rooms within residential suites and all public restrooms; below all floor tile and behind all wall tile.
ii. 3.8H. Wall Tile Installation Method WT-3 – Interior wall and shower-receptor installation on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units; thin-set mortar, TCA W244C-16.
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar
2. Grout; Polymer-modified unsanded grout
3. Joint Width: 1/16 inch
D. Revise Section 09 61 10 Vapor Mitigation and Underlayment at Slabs, 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK, to read as follows:
i. A. Work Included: provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Vapor Mitigation and Self-leveling underlayment shall be provided at existing concrete slabs on grade below resilient flooring and carpet as indicated on the plans.
2. Vapor Mitigation and Self-leveling underlayment shall be provided at all new structural concrete slabs below resilient flooring and carpet as indicated on the plans.
3. Self-leveling Underlayment shall be provided at existing structural concrete slabs on levels 1 and 2 below resilient flooring and carpet as indicated on the plans.
E. See attached section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC revised in its entirety.
F. See attached section 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls revised in its entirety.
G. Delete specification section 23 64 16 Centrifugal Water Chillers.
H. See attached new section 23 64 23-16 Water-Cooled, Scroll Water Chillers issued in its entirety.
I. See attached section 23 72 00 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment revised in its entirety.
J. See attached section 26 32 13 Engine Generators revised in its entirety.
K. See attached section 26 55 61 Stage Lighting Rigging and Audio Visual revised in its entirety. L.
See attached new section 27 32 26 Ring-Down Emergency Telephones issued in its entirety. M. See
attached section 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System revised in its entirety. N. See
attached Volume 1 Appendix A Finish Schedule revised in its entirety.
O. See attached Volume 1 Appendix C Appliance Schedule revised in its entirety.
ALL OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS REMAIN UNCHANGED
Elizabeth King, RA, AIA, LEED BD+C Associate
Phone: (617) 234-3193
Addendum No. 4, March 29, 2018 March 27, 2018 CF-RW-330 Page 4 of 4
Fax: (617) 661-7118 [email protected]
Addendum No. 4, March 29, 2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX A PAGE 1 OF 5
EASTERN CONNECTICUT STATE UNIVERSITY FINISH SCHEDULE ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018
TAG ITEM SPECFICIATION SECTION MANUFACTURER PRODUCT COLOR CONTACT NOTES/COMMENTS METTRO ARCHITECTURAL SALES CUSTOM COLORED TO MATCH WALL DOUG METCALF SEE PARTITION PLAN FOR CG-01 CORNER GUARD 102610 - CORNER GUARDS ACROVYN 4000 MODEL FS-20RN; FLUSH MOUNTED, FULL HEIGHT COLOR 781-545-8100 LOCATIONS METTRO ARCHITECTURAL SALES CO-8, 1" X FULL HEIGHT, SURFACE MOUNTED, METAL, MECHANICALLY DOUG METCALF CG-02 CORNER GUARD 102610 - CORNER GUARDS ACROVYN FASTENED 781-545-8101 AT ALL WALLCOVERINGS ART MEDIA - CHARCOAL MILLIKEN CHA27-48 JANE STRILLCHUK CPT-01 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING MILLIKEN 1 M x 1 M TILE BISTER 617-413-8709 MONOLITHIC INSTALLATION MILLIKEN NATURALLY DRAWN AMERICAS - DRAWING IN INK JANE STRILLCHUK CPT-02 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING MILLIKEN DWK79-174-172 GULF BREEZE/PACIFIC SLOPE 617-413-8709 MILLIKEN NATURALLY DRAWN AMERICAS - WATERCOLOR LESSON JANE STRILLCHUK CPT-03 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING MILLIKEN WLN15-114 MORNING BLEND 617-413-8709 MILLIKEN NATURALLY DRAWN AMERICAS - WATERCOLOR LESSON JANE STRILLCHUK CPT-04 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING MILLIKEN WLN26-102 CANYON RED 617-413-8710 WANDERLUST BENTLEY MILLS STYLE#: 4WNT50220K OPEN ROAD MIKE SMITH QUARTER TURN CPT-05 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING BENTLEY 24" X 24" TILE COLOR #:400330 [email protected] INSTALLATION 124810 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND NUWAY (STANDARD); ALUMINUM SCRAPER BARS; SCARLET WIPER STRIPS; DAVID CASSADY CPT-06 WALK-OFF CARPET SYSTEM FRAMES MATS INC 11/16" THICK SCARLET WIPER STRIPS [email protected] SEE PLAN FOR DIMENSIONS CACHE TWEED TARKETT STYLE #: A0002 NOIR, NOIR JOHN MCNULTY CPT-07 CARPET POWERBOND 096820 - SHEET CARPETING TANDUS CENTIVA 6' POWERBOND ROLL COLOR #: 42704 617-293-7131 POWERBOND ROLL CACHE TWEED TARKETT STYLE #: A0002 NOIR, NOIR JOHN MCNULTY VERTICAL ASHLAR CPT-08 CARPET TILE 096810 - TILE CARPETING TANDUS CENTIVA 24" X 24" TILE COLOR #: 42705 617-293-7132 INSTALLATION
AT ALL EXTERIOR DOORS 124810 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND WITH EXCEPTION OF DOORS CPT-09 WALK-OFF CARPET FRAMES ROLL DOWN MAT; 8'-0" X 6'-0" BLACK TO LOBBY EL-01 ELEVATOR FLOOR MATCH RF-02 SELECT FROM ELEVATOR MANUFACTURER'S FULL STANDARD LINE OF EL-02 ELEVATOR WALLS LAMINATES AND PANEL LAYOUTS SELECT FROM ELEVATOR MANUFACTURER'S FULL STANDARD LINE OF EL-03 ELEVATOR CEILING LAMINATES AND CEILING DESIGNS EPOX-01 EPOXY FLOOR PAINT CALIFORNIA PAINTS ALLFLOR EPOXY FORTIFIED ACRYLIC FLOOR ENAMEL TO MATCH PT-13 FB-01 FABRIC MOMENTUM TEXTILES TACTIC TYPE BOSTON MODERN FURNITURE AMY GRAUBARD FB-02 FABRIC CAMIRA BLAZER LITE PRAISE #LTH54 617-908-1697 BOSTON MODERN FURNITURE AMY GRAUBARD FB-03 FABRIC CAMIRA BLAZER LITE HOPE #LTH50 617-908-1698 BOSTON MODERN FURNITURE AMY GRAUBARD FB-04 FABRIC CAMIRA BLAZER LITE HARMONY #LTH63 617-908-1699 BOSTON MODERN FURNITURE AMY GRAUBARD FB-05 FABRIC CAMIRA BLAZER LITE HAVEN #LTH40 617-908-1700 KELLY BUGALA FB-06 FABRIC JOSEPH NOBLE GENIUS #4500-07 HEEGER 617-512-1662 FRP-01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANEL SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION WHITE 6 1/2'-0" TALL "Wash. Dry. Fold" STENCILED IN CALIFORNIA FB FONT; SEE ELEVATION FOR GR-01 STENCIL GRAPHIC DIMENSIONS. PT-02, EGGSHELL
MB-01 PORCELAIN MARKER BOARD 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES CLARIDGE 800 SERIES PORCELAIN MARKERBOARD. SEE DRAWINGS FOR SIZES WHITE WITH ALUMINUM FRAME FORMICA 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL JEAN MARIE BISSON PLAM-01 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK FORMICA 8841 WHITE ASH - WR WOODBRUSH FINISH [email protected]
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX A PAGE 2 OF 5
TAG ITEM SPECFICIATION SECTION MANUFACTURER PRODUCT COLOR CONTACT NOTES/COMMENTS WILSONART 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL REBECCA CARVER PLAM-02 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK WILSONART NATURAL RECON FINE VELVET TEXTURE FINISH - #7996-38 978-872-8993 PANOLAM 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL CHRIS MELCHER PLAM-03 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK PIONITE SG200 LIMESTONE 860-760-6249 PANOLAM 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL CHRIS MELCHER PLAM-04 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK PIONITE SY914 PRIMARY YELLOW; SUEDE 860-760-6250 WILSONART 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL REBECCA CARVER PLAM-05 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK WILSONART D90-60 NORTH SEA; MATTE FINISH 978-872-8993 MILLWORK 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL CALYPSO CHRIS MECHLER PLAM-06 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK NEVAMAR WZ0057T TEXTURED [email protected] 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL GRAYSON BRAUN PLAM-07 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK ABET LAMINATI 857 SEI [email protected] UPPER CABINETS FORMICA 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL JEAN MARIE BISSON PLAM-08 PLASTIC LAMINATE WOODWORK FORMICA LEAF GREEN - MATTE FINISH [email protected] PT-01 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1030-2 PALE PINE PT-02 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1010-2 FOG PT-03 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1010-4 STEPPING STONE PT-04 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG 1157-5 VANITY PT-05 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1012-6 VOLCANIC ASH PT-06 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1023-1 OATMEAL PT-07 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG 1190-7 RUM PUNCH PT-08 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG 1150-5 ACAPULCO CLIFFS PT-09 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1150-3 EVERGLADE MIST PT-10 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1158-6 BLUE OASIS BANQUETTE MILLWORK PT-11 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1162-6 TEENY BIKINI PT-12 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG 1009-4 GRAY STONE PT-13 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1007-3 GHOST WRITER PT-14 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1001-6 KNIGHT'S ARMOR STAIR RISERS PT-15 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1006-2 SHARK PT-16 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1203-5 ZING PT-17 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1010-1 PEGASUS PT-18 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG1002-2 ARCTIC COTTON PT-19 PAINT 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PPG OR EQUAL PPG-1177-6 GRAPE JELLY PTF-01 PAINTED FLOOR 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PAINT EXISTING FLOOR MATCH PT-13 PARALLEL 20 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND J6219 KIM SEARS RUNNING BOND RF-01 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES ARMSTRONG 12" X 24" PLANKS REDONDO BEACH 978-380-8373 INSTALLATION 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND CHRIS VANCE RF-02 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES FORBO MARMOLEUM STRIATO COLOR LINEAR SHEET 5254 RED ROSES 802-310-0201 SHEET GOOD 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND TUNDRA NINA OLIVERI RF-03 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES ALTRO STRONGHOLD 30; 3MM COLOR #:K30500 617-678-5809 STATIC DISSIPATIVE FLOORING JOHNSONITE 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND 713 GRANIT SD ROXANE SPEARS RF-04 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES JOHNSONITE SHEET KETTLE BLACK B 440-708-5718 GREEN SOURCE SOLUTIONS 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND LISA WALTERS RF-05 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES LANGHORN FLOORING CORKFLEX; 1/4" x 36"x36"; INTERLOCKING TILE COLD LAVA 617-799-1800 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ASHLEY PERKINS RF-06 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES MOHAWK HOT & HEAVY SECOYA C0009 KEW GARDENS #142 978 886 4395 JOHNSONITE 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ROXANE SPEARS FOR USE ON UNIT PLATFORM RF-07 RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES JOHNSONITE RUBBER FLOOR TREADS, RISER & SQUARE NOSING; BAMBOO PATTERN CHARCOAL 440-708-5718 RISERS, TREADS & NOSING SEE SPEC MANUAL - RS-01 SHADES 122400 - SHADES MECHOSHADE EQUINOX BLACKOUT 0100 SERIES (OPAQUE) 0117 GRAPHITE MECHANIZED
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX A PAGE 3 OF 5
TAG ITEM SPECFICIATION SECTION MANUFACTURER PRODUCT COLOR CONTACT NOTES/COMMENTS
FOR USE IN CAFÉ. SURFACE MOUNTED INSTALLATION WITH BEAD CHAIN (STAINLESS STEEL) CLUTCH (WHITE); P-CLIP CORD TENSION DEVICE; OPTIONAL BRACKET COVER; REGULAR RS-02 SHADES 122400 - SHADES MECHOSHADE ECOVEIL 1350 SERIES - 5% OPEN 1370 SHADOW GREY ROLL
FOR USE IN UNITS. SURFACE MOUNTED INSTALLATION WITH BEAD CHAIN (STAINLESS STEEL) CLUTCH (WHITE); P-CLIP CORD TENSION DEVICE; OPTIONAL BRACKET RS-03 SHADES 122400 - SHADES HUNTER DOUGLAS OR EQUAL VINYL ROLLER SHADE - OPAQUE WHITE COVER; REGULAR ROLL SS-01 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP STAINLESS STEEL WITH MIST FINISH; NO PATTERN STAINLESS STEEL DUPONT 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL ARCTIC ICE DAVE ABRAM SSF-01 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK CORIAN BASIC EASED EDGE [email protected]
ADASTRA Q3006(3) WILSONART 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL TYPE 062 - 2CM THICKNESS REBECCA CARVER SSF-02 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK WILSONART BASIC EASED EDGE 978-872-8993 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL HIMACS G031 EMILY TAUSEK SSF-03 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK LG HAUSYS BASIC EASED EDGE BLACK GRANITE 857-800-1396
KEY WEST Q1008 (1) WILSONART 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL TYPE 063 - 3CM THICKNESS REBECCA CARVER SSF-04 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK WILSONART BASIC EASED EDGE 978-872-8993 STELLAR BLANCO 13, STELLAR SNOW 13 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL .75" THICKNESS BRENDAN MERCIER SSF-06 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK SILESTONE BASIC EASED EDGE 774-504-4144 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL YVONNE DUMAS SSF-07 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK CAESARSTONE 5141 FROSTY CARRINA 781-769-0356 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL PAUL HASTINGS SSF-08 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK DUPONT ZODIAQ CONCRETE CARRARA 617-447-0349 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL YVONNE DUMAS SSF-09 SOLID SURFACE WOODWORK CAESARSTONE #6600 781-769-0356
STN-01 STONE THRESHOLD 093000 - TILING SINGLE BEVEL THRESHOLD 4 X 3/4"; ABSOLUTE BLACK NATURAL STONE
DALTILE GROUT: LATICRETE #78 ELISA FRANKLIN STERLING SILVER TL-01 FLOOR TILE 093000 - TILING DALTILE KEYSTONES 1" HEXAGON MOSAIC D014 DESERT GRAY 617-605-2823 TILE INSTALLATION: FT-4
JASON CONNORS GROUT: LATICRETE #22 CREATIVE MATERAILS CORP MIDNIGHT BLACK 508-479-7114 TILE INSTALLATION: FT-2/FT- TL-02 FLOOR TILE 093000 - TILING CREATIVE MATERIALS CORP 12 x 24 MIRAGE OFFICINE OF OF 04 NATURAL [email protected] 3 @ CAFÉ
CUSTOM MIX: JASON CONNORS LIGHT GREEN 600 CREATIVE MATERAILS CORP GROUT: LATICRETE #44 PISTACHIO 601 508-479-7114 BRIGHT WHITE TL-03 GLASS TILE 093000 - TILING CREATIVE MATERIALS CORP COLORS COLLECTION - VIDREPUR - 1 X 1 TILES DARK GREEN 602 [email protected] TILE INSTALLATION: WT-2
TILE INSTALLATION: WT-2 & WT-3 at TOILET ROOMS RUNNING BOND DALTILE INSTALLATION ELISA FRANKLIN GROUT: LATICRETE #45 TL-04 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING DALTILE RITTENHOUSE SQUARE 3X6 GLAZED CERAMIC TILE WHITE 617-605-2823 RAVEN
TILE INSTALLATION: WT-3 JASON CONNORS STRAIGHT JOINT CREATIVE MATERAILS CORP INSTALLATION 508-479-7114 GROUT: LATICRETE #78 TL-05 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING CREATIVE MATERIALS CORP CASABLANCA - MATTE FINISH GREY MIX [email protected] STERLING SILVER
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX A PAGE 4 OF 5
TAG ITEM SPECFICIATION SECTION MANUFACTURER PRODUCT COLOR CONTACT NOTES/COMMENTS
TILE INSTALLATION: WT-3 RUNNING BOND DALTILE INSTALLATION ELISA FRANKLIN GROUT: LATICRETE #78 TL-06 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING DALTILE SEMI GLOSS - 4X4 WHITE 617-605-2823 STERLING SILVER
TILE INSTALLATION: WT-3 DALTILE RUNNING BOND ELISA FRANKLIN INSTALLATION: #78 TL-07 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING DALTILE SEMI GLOSS - 4X4 SUNFLOWER 617-605-2823 STERLING SILVER
JASON CONNORS CREATIVE MATERAILS CORP 508-479-7114 TILE INSTALLATION: WT-2 [email protected] GROUT: LATICRETE #44 TL-08 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING CREATIVE MATERIALS CORP ANGLE GLASS GRAY GLOSSY BRIGHT WHITE BEST TILE TILE INSTALLATION: WT-2 PLANE LARGE PORCELAIN PANEL; 5' X 10' CALACATTA VENA A JOHN ALVES GROUT: LATICRETE #85 TL-09 CERAMIC TILE 093000 - TILING STONEPEAK CERAMICS STYLE #: USSP12060088 POLISHED 781-752-9766 ALMOND JOHNSONITE 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND MILLWORK WALLBASE; EQUINOX PROFILE ROXANE SPEARS WB-01 RUBBER BASE ACCESSORIES JOHNSONITE MW-XX-R 40 BLACK 440-708-5718 JOHNSONITE 096510 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND TRADITIONAL WALLBASE; 4" ROXANE SPEARS WB-02 RUBBER BASE ACCESSORIES JOHNSONITE DC-XXX-4 CHARCOAL 440-708-5718
JASON CONNORS CREATIVE MATERAILS CORP 508-479-7114 WB-03 TILE BASE 093000 - TILING CREATIVE MATERIALS CORP 2.75 X 24 BULLNOSE BASE MIRAGE OFFICINE OF OF 04 NATURAL [email protected] FOR USE WITH TL-02
WB-04 WOOD BASE ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK H58B PROFILE WOOD BASE 1-1/16" X 6-7/16" PAINTED TO MATCH WALL FOR USE IN AUDITORIUM DREAM DESIGN SOURCE MAGIC MOMENTS VIJDAN HASAN WC-01 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA GL5241A GL5241A 203-543-1259 NOT IN CONTRACT DREAM DESIGN SOURCE BELLY WOOD VIJDAN HASAN WC-02 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA GLPC41A GLPC41A 203-543-1260 NOT IN CONTRACT DETROIT WALLPAPERS ALEXSHAY EDWARDS-SWOPE WC-03 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS DETROIT WALLPAPER DOTTY WOTTY COLORWAY 1 [email protected] NOT IN CONTRACT DETROIT WALLPAPERS ALEXSHAY EDWARDS-SWOPE WC-04 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS DETROIT WALLPAPER DIG DUG COLORWAY1 [email protected] NOT IN CONTRACT AVIARY WC-05 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS SCHUMACHER #2705510 BLACK ON WHITE NOT IN CONTRACT WC-06 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS OSBORNE & LITTLE CUBISTE W6896-02 NOT IN CONTRACT FLAVOR PAPER TODD TILEV WC-07 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS FLAVOR PAPER BROWNSTONER 718-422-0230 NOT IN CONTRACT DREAM DESIGN SOURCE VIJDAN HASAN WC-08 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA DRIP GLPO201A 203-543-1261 NOT IN CONTRACT COMIC POP WALL MURAL WC-09 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GRAHAM & BROWN #102151 NOT IN CONTRACT WC-10 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA POND HL111A WC-11 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS NOT IN USE FLAVOR PAPER TODD TILEV WC-12 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA WEEKEND GL11121A 718-422-0231 WC-13 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS ASTEK DREAMS SMOKE DREAM DESIGN SOURCE VIJDAN HASAN WC-14 WALL COVERING 097200 - WALL COVERINGS GLAMORA STILL MC11A 203-543-1266 TO BE SPECIFIED BY STAGE WD-01 AUDITORIUM STAGE SEE SPECIFICATION CONSULTANT 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MATCH CONTROL SAMPLE TO VERMONT INDUSTRIES RED OAK VENEER, WD-02 WOOD WOODWORK WHEAT FINISH FOR UNIT STORAGE CUBBIES
WD-03 EXISTING WOOD FLOOR 096400 - WOOD FLOORING DALENE REFINISH EXISTING WOOD FLOORING - SEE SPECIFICATION MANUAL.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX A PAGE 5 OF 5
TAG ITEM SPECFICIATION SECTION MANUFACTURER PRODUCT COLOR CONTACT NOTES/COMMENTS GREGG DOBLE ASSOCIATES 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL SRW 5001 ERIC HAMYLAK WD-04 WOOD WOODWORK SIENA MIXED RECLAIMED HARDWOOD AND SOFTWOODS BARNWOOD UNFINISHED 781-850-5156 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WD-05 WOOD WOODWORK MATCH EXISTING BENCH 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MATCH CONTROL SAMPLE TO VERMONT INDUSTRIES RED OAK VENEER, WD-06 WOOD WOODWORK WHEAT FINISH FOR WOOD DOORS RICHELIEU 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL BARILLO PANEL CABERNET SAUVIGNON NANCY CORBIN WP-01 WALL PANEL WOODWORK RICHELIEU PWO802 TAUPE/BROWN 508-561-3908
SIZE VARIES; SEE FINISH NOTE 097713 - STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL 1" THICK SNAPLOC PANEL SYSTEM; TACKABLE MICORE MINERAL ROBERT CARROLL #9. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR WP-02 TACKABLE WALL PANEL SYSTEMS STRETCHWALL FIBERBOARD CORE; SQUARE EDGE; FABRIC: CAMIRA BLAZER LITE SEE ELEVATIONS FOR FABRIC [email protected] FABRIC. FINISH FABRIC: CARNEGIE XOREL FRAGMENT EMBOSS WP-03 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL 098430 - SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS CONWED DESIGNSCAPE RESPOND A100, 4' X 10' X 1", FABRIC FINISH #6263W 819 WRAP FABRIC. SEE DETAIL. SEE ELEVATION FOR WP-04 TACKABLE WALL PANEL FORBO BULLETIN BOARD 2204 DIMENSIONS
CLEAR MIRROR 088000 - GLAZING CLEAR MIRROR WITH POLISHED EDGES AND J CHANNEL TOP & BOTTOM
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM #4 - 03.27.2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX C PAGE 1 OF 2 EASTERN CONNECTICUT STATE UNIVERSITY APPLIANCE PACKAGES CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
ROOM TYPE APPLIANCE PACKAGE OPTION 1 OPTION 1 - SIZE KT-01, KT-02 Range Hotpoint RA824DDWW 24"w x 26.5"d x 40.5"h Fridge Kenmore 76392 24.25"w x 27.94"d x 61.75"h Hood Kenmore 50941 25"w x 17.5"d x 6"h KT-03 Range GE JDS28DFWW 31.25"w x 28.5"d x 27"h Fridge Kenmore 76392 24.25"w x 27.94"d x 61.75"h Hood Kenmore 50941 25"w x 17.5"d x 6"h KT-04 Range Hotpoint RA824DDWW 24"w x 26.5"d x 40.5"h Fridge Kenmore 70302 28"w x 31.88"d x 60.13"h Hood Kenmore 50941 25"w x 17.5"d x 6"h KT-05 (HD) Range Kenmore 94142 29.88"w x 25.75"d x 47.75"h Fridge Kenmore 70302 28"w x 31.88"d x 60.13"h Microwave Kenmore P11043APH-WJW 21.77w x 18.5d x 12.24h Dishwasher Kenmore 13222 24"W x 24.75"d x 34"h Hood Kenmore 55802 30"w x 20"d x 7.25"h Kitchen / Lounge Range Kenmore 42533 31.5"w x 28.31"d x 36.625"h Microwave Kenmore P11043APH-WJS 21.77w x 18.5d x 12.24h Hood See Food Service Equipment Vendor Specifications HD/RA Office Fridge Kenmore 70302 28"w x 31.88"d x 60.13"h Media Room Microwave Kenmore P11043APH-WJS 21.77"w x 18.5"d x 12.24"h Game Room Microwave Kenmore P11043APH-WJS 21.77"w x 18.5"d x 12.24"h HD Apartment Washer Blomberg WM98200SX 33 1/8" h x 23 5/8" w x 25 3/8" d Ventless Dryer Blomberg DHP24400W & stack kit 33 5/16" h x 23 3/8" w x 26 9/16" d
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 - March 27, 2018 SECTION 150000 APPENDIX C PAGE 2 OF 2
ROOM TYPE APPLIANCE PACKAGE OPTION 2 OPTION 2 - SIZE PACKAGE OPTION 3 OPTION 3 - SIZE KT-01, KT-02 Range Avanti ER24POWG 23.5"w x 25"d x 40.75"h Summit WEM610W 24"w x 24"d x 40"h Fridge Avanti RA7306WT 24"w x 28.75"d x 60"h Summit FF1386W 24"w x 28.75"d x 59.88"h Hood Avanti RH24POW 24"w x 20.25"d x 5.5"h Summit H1624W 24"w x 18"d x 5"h KT-03 Range GE JDS28DFWW 31.25"w x 28.5"d x 27"h GE JDS28DFWW 31.25"w x 28.5"d x 27"h Fridge Avanti RA7306WT 24"w x 28.75"d x 60"h Summit FF1386W 24"w x 28.75"d x 59.88"h Hood Avanti RH24POW 24"w x 20.25"d x 5.5"h Summit H1624W 24"w x 18"d x 5"h KT-04 Range Avanti ER24POWG 23.5"w x 25"d x 40.75"h Summit WEM610W 24"w x 24"d x 40"h Fridge Avanti FF18D0W 29.5"w x 32"d x 66.5"h Whirlpool WRT134TFDW 28"w x 32"d x 63"h Hood Avanti RH24POW 24"w x 20.25"d x 5.5"h Summit H1624W 24"w x 18"d x 5"h KT-05 (HD) Range GE JBS45DFWW 30"w x 28.75"d x 47"h Summit WEM230DK 30"w x 24"d x 44"h Fridge GE GTE16GTHWW 28"w x 31.75" x 64.75"h Whirlpool WRT134TFDW 28"w x 32"d x 63"h Microwave GE PEB9159DJWW 21.75"w x 20"d x 13"h Summit SM1102WH 21.23"w x 15.5"d x 11.75"h Dishwasher GE GDF570SGJWW 23.75"w x 24"d x 34"h Whirlpool WDF330PAHW 24"w x 24.5"d x 34.5"h Hood GE JVX3300DJWW 30"w x 20"d x 5.5"h Summit H1630W 30"w x 18"d x 5"h Kitchen / Lounge Range GE JB450RKSS 30"w x 28.75"d x 47"h Whirlpool WEE510S0FS 30"w x 29"d x 37"h Microwave GE PEB9159SJSS 21.75"w x 20"d x 13"h Whirlpool WMC30516AS 21.75"w x 17.25"s x 13"h Hood See Food Service Equipment Vendor Specifications See Food Service Equipment Vendor Specifications HD/RA Office Fridge Avanti FF18D0W 29.5"w x 32"d x 66.5"h Whirlpool WRT134TFDW 28"w x 32"d x 63"h Media Room Microwave GE PEB9159SJSS 21.75"w x 20"d x 13"h Whirlpool WMC30516AS 21.75"w x 17.25"s x 13"h Game Room Microwave GE PEB9159SJSS 21.75"w x 20"d x 13"h Whirlpool WMC30516AS 21.75"w x 17.25"s x 13"h
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 - March 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 1 OF 48
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. See Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for additional work associated with this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B. This Section includes the following items for wiring systems used as signal pathways for high- speed data transmission:
1. Mounting elements. 2. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling. 3. Fiber-optic cabling.
C. Identification products, related sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to this Section. 2. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to this Section. 3. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for smoke dampers mounted in HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Work in this Section includes:
1. A complete system including power and control wiring of all control system components and devices. 2. Wiring circuits which are activated/de-activated by a control system component, such as but not limited to, EP/PE devices, high and low limit protective devices, solenoid air valves, relays, end switches, etc. 3. Control panel wiring to control panels (unless noted otherwise) and to terminal strips, and field wiring from terminal strips to field-mounted devices. 4. Wiring to the "auto" side of hand-off-auto switches on units being controlled by the controls contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. Power and control wiring to all control system equipment including, but not limited to, control panels, motorized dampers and valve actuators, control transformers, air terminal unit actuators, time clocks, relays, transformers, PE switches, remote switches, and all other control devices. Provide power wiring from electrical panel circuit breakers. Circuit breakers provided under Division 26 Section "Panelboards." Coordinate requirements with the Division 26 Contractor. Connect control panels to standby branch of power.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 2 OF 48
7. Control equipment and devices that are provided with a voltage rating readily available at the location of installation. Coordinate with Contract Documents and Division 26 Contractor. 8. Wiring between components of packaged equipment (i.e., humidifier to airflow proving switch, etc.). 9. Provision and wiring of all remote manual control devices, including but not limited to, on/off switches, on/off switches with pilot lights, manual time switches, variable speed control switches. 10. Wiring of all smoke dampers including power wiring to damper; wiring between fire alarm system interface device and smoke dampers including all necessary control relays, contacts, and devices, rated for voltages and amperages involved; wiring of smoke damper end switches for control sequencing. Coordinate with Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System." 11. Interlock wiring from a fire alarm system interface device and/or duct-mounted smoke detector relay contact to unit control circuit for system shutdown, including all necessary control relays and devices rated for voltages and amperages involved. Coordinate with Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System." 12. Interlock wiring from a fire alarm system interface device to unit control circuit for system emergency shutdown, including all necessary control relays and devices rated for voltages and amperages involved. Coordinate with Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System." 13. All line voltage wiring and conduit. Comply with the requirements of Division 26 Section "Wires and Cables." A licensed electrician shall perform all work in strict accordance with the NEC and other local codes. 14. All control wiring and cable. A licensed electrician shall perform all work in strict accordance with the NEC and other local codes. 15. Integration with balancing work to provide support and calibration. 16. Alternate wall mounted device locations as selected by the Architect and/or Engineer up to 15 feet from locations shown on plans. 17. Ethernet devices, hardware and coordination as required to access LAN and Internet.
E. Work By Others: The following work shall be performed by the associated division contractor under the supervision and coordination of this subcontractor.
1. Division 23 Sections "Hydronic Piping" and "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" contractor shall be responsible for:
a. Installation of all line size and non-line size automatic valves and separable wells furnished under this contract. b. Furnish and install all necessary valved pressure taps, steam, water and drain wells and overflow connections to piping. c. Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow indicating devices.
2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" contractor shall be responsible for:
a. Install all control and smoke dampers and provide safing as required to install non- duct size dampers. b. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts of externally mounted damper motors.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 3 OF 48
c. Provide and locate sheet metal baffle plates in ductwork, units, mixing boxes, plenums, etc., as required to eliminate stratification. Affix baffles permanently in place after stratification problem has been eliminated. d. Provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. e. Mount airflow measuring stations and static pressure sensors in ductwork as directed under this contract. f. Mount air valves in ductwork as directed by this contractor. g. Install all duct smoke detectors as furnished under Division 28.
3. Division 26 contract shall be responsible for:
a. Furnishing, installing and terminating all feeder and/or branch circuit wiring to major equipment including:
1) Wiring to and between all disconnects, starters, drives and equipment motors.
b. Furnishing and installing of circuit breakers (20 A-1 phase) in power panels for use by the Automatic Temperature Control System (ATCS) Contractor to power the ATCS. c. Furnishing duct smoke detectors specified under Division 28. The installation of the detectors shall be under Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and as supervised by this Contractor. The Division 26 Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring between the detector and the fire alarm system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backbone: A facility (e.g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between automation system cabinets or between buildings.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
D. DDC: Direct digital control.
E. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
F. Horizontal Cabling: Cabling between, and including, the building automation system outlet or the first mechanical terminations on the horizontal connection point and the horizontal cross- connect.
G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
H. I/O: Input/output.
I. LAN: Local area network.
J. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 4 OF 48
K. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
L. PC: Personal computer.
M. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
N. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
O. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit.
P. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
Q. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy: The system shall report all values with an end to end minimum accuracy as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 5 OF 48
9. Stability and Accuracy of Control: Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within the following minimum tolerances:
a. Liquid Pressure (Greater Than 1 psig): Plus or minus 1.5 psig. b. Liquid Pressure (Less Than 50 Inch wg): Plus or minus 1.0 inch wg. c. Air Pressure (0-6 Inch wg Range): Plus or minus 0.2 . d. Air Pressure (0.01-0.1 Inch wg Range): Plus or minus 0.0.1 inch wg. e. Air Flow: Plus or minus 10% of full range. f. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. g. Duct Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. h. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.
1.5 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. The following items are common requirements that apply unless noted otherwise:
1. All setpoints shall be program adjustable at the operator workstation. 2. All high and low limits shall be alarmed. 3. All cooling coils located in or over occupied spaces shall have a condensate pan high level alarm. 4. All hydronic proof of flow shall be via current sensors. 5. All fan proof of operation shall be by high and low current sensors. 6. All unit smoke detection, freeze protection, high condensate level and other emergency shutdown shall be done by hardwired relay interlock and shall not rely on control system programming. 7. All dampers shall have open and close status indication through end switches or integral actuator feature. 8. All dampers shall have an independent control point. Multiple dampers of different applications (i.e., outdoor, return, relief) controlled from a single point are not acceptable. 9. All air handling systems with ducted outdoor air shall be provided with freeze protection.
1.6 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL
A. Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications. Four copies of the proposal shall be submitted at the time of Bid. Proposals that are unbound, loose, in a file folder, or stapled in a file folder will not be acceptable. The technical proposal shall include the following data/information as a minimum.
1. Information on organizational capabilities to handle this project (project management, personnel and staffing, single source responsibility, etc.). 2. Information and description of training program. 3. Description of system architecture including schematic block diagram showing building front end workstation, MER touch screen displays, DDC panels, interface with existing campus Building Automation System (BAS) network, and future interface with the control system. 4. Describe system operation, functions and control techniques. 5. A full description of system modularity. 6. Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancements. 7. Provide hardware and software technical data sheets on system interfaces and integration requirements. 8. Provide a detailed narrative description of how the new building wide BAS will interface with the existing campus wide system. Include a description of all hardware and software
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 6 OF 48
upgrades (including web-based enhancements) required for the existing campus wide system for seamless integration. 9. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy management software provided for this project. 10. Provide a detailed narrative description of approach to complying with the LEED measurement and verification requirements described in this Specification. Include a description of hardware, software and energy usage color graphic pages. Describe in detail the proposed approach to graphical pages, navigation, energy usage calculations, historical trending, and hyperlinks to main building graphical user interface. Provide a list and description of other installed and operating BAS projects with LEED requirements. 11. Provide a written guarantee of how long the system proposed will be a standard product backed by ongoing parts availability and factory/field technical support. 12. A signed certificate stating that the BAS Contractor has read the performance and functional requirements, understands them, and that the technical proposal shall conform with all parts of the Specification. Provide a line by line concordance summary stating compliance with every specification section herein. 13. Provide a recommended spare parts list, which the Owner shall maintain at the site with the associated cost of each part. The BAS Contractor shall provide a separate spare parts list for both the warranty period and beyond for the post-warranty period. All spare parts recommended shall be made available 10 years beyond the warranty period. 14. Provide detailed information on the web server browser package proposed for this project.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications. 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 7 OF 48
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.
9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, operator notations, and a graphics tree showing how graphics are organized and linked. 10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.
D. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.
G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
H. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
I. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
J. Field quality-control test reports.
K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 8 OF 48
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. 6. An electronic copy of all graphics, programming and settings in final as-built form on a CD-ROM.
L. Project Record Drawings: These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of magnetic media including CAD, .DWG, or .DXF drawing files also shall be provided.
M. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists: Completed versions of all reports and checklists, along with all trend logs, used to meet the requirements of Part 3 "Demonstration and Acceptance."
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BICSI.
1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at the project site.
C. Electrical Installer: Line voltage wiring for the automatic control system shall be done by a Licensed Electrician.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and confirm location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Architect/Engineer and plans and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system, including power/control voltage ratings and control sequence requirements.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 9 OF 48
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation, including emergency power to all control components necessary to assure proper operation of HVAC equipment on the emergency power distribution system.
D. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.
E. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.
F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Sections "Enclosed Controllers" and "Variable- Frequency Motor Controllers" to achieve compatibility with controllers and annunciation devices.
G. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
H. Coordinate support of balancing requirements and system component calibration requirements with Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
I. Schedule meeting with Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, BMS Contractor and Commissioning Agent before installation to coordinate integration of controls with mechanical equipment. Include unit manufacturer representative as required, based on each type of equipment.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Additional Points: Provide a minimum of 10% spare point hardware capacity in each controller and panel of each point type; analog and digital, input and output powered and dry. 2. Replacement Materials: 5%, but no less than 2 of each type of wall mounted sensor (thermostats, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, etc.).
1.12 LICENSING
A. Software: Owner has full license of use of all software programming, including the right to change and edit programming to suit needs.
B. Protocols: Owner has full license to all system and networking protocols.
C. Points: Owner has full license to all system points to change, modify or otherwise alter to suit needs.
1.13 TRAINING
A. Provide five days of training on site.
B. The BAS Contractor shall provide instructors to give full instructions to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the system installed. Instructors shall be
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 10 OF 48
thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. All training shall be held during normal work hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 pm weekdays.
C. Training shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Explanation of drawings and operations and maintenance manuals. 2. Walk-through of the job to locate control components. 3. DDC controller and TEC operation. 4. Explanation of adjustment, calibration, and replacement procedures.
D. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner’s representative. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Construction Manager after submission and approval of formal training plans.
1.14 SERVICE CONTRACT
A. First Year Basic Service Agreement: Provide the following service for the first year in addition to warranty related work:
1. Six full day visits that can be used at the Owner’s discretion, for programming, training, system modifications or other desired work. 2. One full day in the 11th month:
a. Recalibrate 25% of all sensors as selected by the Owner. b. Retests 10% of all damper and valve actuators as selected by Owner.
B. Provide a proposal for a full annual onsite service contract for each of years 2 through 5 including:
1. Annual device calibration. 2. 48 hour service turnaround. 3. Premium charge for 24 hour service turnaround. 4. Premium charge for off hours service.
C. Coordinate with Eastern on incorporation of Shafer Hall into present Service Contract.
1.15 MOCKUPS
A. Provide mockup of project-specific system graphics on each system as described in "23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for review and approval by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMUNICATION AND ARCHITECTURE
A. All control products provided for this project shall comprise a BACnet internetwork. Communication involving control components (i.e., all types of controllers and operator interfaces) shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995, BACnet.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 11 OF 48
B. Each BACnet device shall operate on the BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol specified for that device as defined in this Section.
C. The Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the internetwork.
D. All controllers shall have a communication port for connections with the operator interfaces using the BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
E. Remote operator interface shall be via web-based server software for remote operator interface using the BACnet PTP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. Remote operator interface via this software shall allow for communication with any and all controllers on this network as described below.
F. Communication services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:
1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the internetwork. 2. All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom program variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to an object name not located in that controller is entered into the controller’s database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communication services to perform internetwork value passing.
G. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily via the internetwork. An operator change to the time clock in any controller shall be automatically broadcast to all controllers on the internetwork.
H. The internetwork shall have the following minimum capacity for future expansion:
1. Each building controller shall have routing capacity for 50 controllers. 2. The building controller network shall have capacity for 50 building controllers. 3. The system shall have an overall capacity for 12,500 building controllers, custom application controller, and application specific controller input/output objects.
I. Building Controllers: Provide an adequate number of building controllers to achieve the performance specified in Part 1 article on "System Performance." Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements:
1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be composed of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based building controllers to manage the global strategies of the system. 2. The building controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, trending, and programming requirements. 3. Data shall be shared between networked building controllers. 4. The operating system of the building controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 12 OF 48
5. Each building controller shall reside on a BACnet network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol. Each building controller also shall perform BACnet routing to a network of custom application and application specific controllers. 6. The controller shall provide a service communication port using BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol for connection to a portable operator’s terminal.
J. Manufacturers:
1. Alerton Inc.; BACTalk
K. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, power and control wiring, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Workstation/Web Server: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows:
1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, a minimum of two on the front of the case, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio with speakers, bios, and hardware monitoring. 2. Processor: 64-bit Quad Core Intel® Xeon® processors 5400 series. 3. Random-Access Memory: 2 GB, DDR2 SDRAM FBD memory, 667 MHz, ECC (2 DMMS). 4. Graphics: 1.5 GB card, 150 watts in x16 PCI express slot. 5. Monitor: 22 inch widescreen, adjustable stand, VGA/DVI. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 250 GB SATA 3.0 Gb/s, 7200 RPM hard drive with 8 MB cache. 8. DVD CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 16X DVD+/-RW and 4X Blu-Ray disc. 9. Mouse: "Intellimouse" two button with wheel. 10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa. 11. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional –x64 Edition with high-speed Internet access.
a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
12. Printer: Color, laser-jet type as follows:
a. Print Head: 600 x 600 dpi resolution. b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 250 sheet trays. c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 pages per minute.
13. Application Software:
a. I/O capability from operator station. b. BACnet "Workstation" capability. c. Web browser based interoperability. d. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. e. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. f. Database creation and support. g. Automatic and manual database save and restore.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 13 OF 48
h. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and symbols. i. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. j. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. k. Alarm and event processing. l. Object and property status and control. m. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. n. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:
1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs.
o. Custom report development. p. Utility and weather reports. q. Microsoft Office Professional (latest version). r. Two year subscription to Norton Internet Security or McAfee Internet Security Suite. s. ASHRAE Guideline 3 report. t. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules.
14. Custom Application Software:
a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.
B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:
1. System: With one integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), wireless-N router, integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring. 2. Processor: Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo T7800 (2.60 GHz, 4M L2 cache, 800 MHz) Dual Core Processor. 3. Random-Access Memory: 2.0 GB, DDR2-667 MHz SDRAM, 2 DIMMS. 4. Graphics: 512 MB, 256 dedicated cache. 5. Monitor: 17 inches, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB hard drive, 5400 RPM. 8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 24X CD-RW/DVD. 9. Pointing Device: Touch pad with fingerprint reader.
C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random- access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 14 OF 48
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:
a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment.
3. Standard Application Programs:
a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging. b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover. c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing. d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access. e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 6. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:
a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 15 OF 48
5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:
1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.
1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 16 OF 48
4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol using LonTalk protocol. 5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 6. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.
2.4 INPUT DEVICES
A. General Requirements:
1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements.
B. Temperature Sensors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Primary controls manufacturer. b. Ashcroft, Inc. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. Vaisala Group. e. Veris Industries.
2. General Requirements:
a. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type and shall be 2-wire 1000 ohm RTD.
3. Room Temperature Sensors:
a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:
1) Setpoint reset slide switch providing a +/-3 degrees (adjustable) range. 2) Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches. 3) A momentary override request pushbutton for activation of after-hours operation. 4) Analog thermometer.
4. Thermo Wells:
a. Thermo wells shall be pressure-rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure. b. Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2" NFT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement.
5. Outside Air Sensors:
a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element. c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 17 OF 48
6. Duct Mount Sensors:
a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct, and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly, including lock nut and mounting plate. c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used.
7. Averaging Sensors:
a. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used. b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of four sensing points per 12 ft. long segment. c. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing string.
C. Humidity Sensors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Primary controls manufacturer. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. Setra Systems, Inc. d. Vaisala Group. e. Veris Industries.
2. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity sensor of the bulk polymer design. The sensor element shall resist service contamination. 3. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2-wire isolated loop powered 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output. 4. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead loss and analog to digital conversion. Three percent between 20% and 80% RH at 77 deg F unless specified elsewhere. 5. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rainproof, perforated cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel bushings. 6. A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated. 7. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel and shall be equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.
D. Differential Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ashcroft, Inc. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. Setra Systems, Inc.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 18 OF 48
d. Veris Industries.
2. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:
a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input. b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal. c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with tee fittings and shutoff valves in the high and low sensing pickup lines to allow the Balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection. d. A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
3. Low Differential Water Pressure Applications (0" to 20" w.c.):
a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications:
1) 0.01 to 20" w.c. input differential pressure range. 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
4. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21" w.c.):
a. The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications with the following exceptions:
1) Differential pressure range 10" w.c. to 300 psi. 2) Reference Accuracy: +1% of full span (includes non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided.
5. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1" to +1" w.c.):
a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 19 OF 48
b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications:
1) -1.00 to +1.00 w.c. input differential pressure ranges (select range appropriate for system application). 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
6. Low Differential Air Pressure Applications (0" to 5" w.c.):
a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications:
1) 0.00 - 1.00" to 5.00" w.c. input differential pressure ranges (select range appropriate for system application). 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.
7. Medium Differential Air Pressure Applications (5" to 21" w.c.):
a. The pressure transmitter shall be similar to the low air pressure transmitter, except that the performance specifications are not as severe. Differential pressure transmitters shall be provided that meet the following performance requirements:
1) Zero and Span (c/o F.S./Deg. F): 0.04% including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. 2) Accuracy: 1% F.S. (best straight line) static pressure effect; 0.5% F.S. (to 100 psig. 3) Thermal Effects: <+.033 F.S./deg F over 40 deg F to 100 deg F (calibrated at 70 deg F).
b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided.
E. Gas Detectors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Aircuity, Inc. b. MSA Inc. c. TSI Incorporated. d. Vaisala Group. e. Vulcan - Honeywell International Inc.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 20 OF 48
2. The detector shall include a sensor or sensors connected to a control panel. Each distinct type of gas detection shall have a separate control panel. The control panel shall enable communication through its BACnet output using BACnet/IP protocol over twisted- pair Ethernet (10BaseT). 3. A self-test function allows for the activation/deactivation of all programmed outputs by simulating a continuous 5% increase/decrease value until the maximum/minimum value is reached. 4. A real-time clock enables operation of the outputs for a specific timeframe. 5. Manufacture to UL 1244 label and CSA 22.2. 6. Carbon Dioxide Transmitters:
a. Resolution Level: 1 ppm. b. Resolution Range: 0-2000 ppm. c. First Alarm: 850 ppm. d. Second Alarm: 1500 ppm. e. Mounting Height: 5 ft. f. Effective Radius: 20 ft. g. Temperature Range: -10 to 100 deg F. h. Duct or wall mount as indicated. i. Outputs: BACnet, RS485, DPDT.
7. The refrigerant leak detector shall sense the type of refrigerant used in the specified chillers. Multiple sensors shall be required to detect different refrigerants:
a. Resolution Level: 1 ppm. b. Resolution Range: 0-2000 ppm. c. First Alarm: 250 ppm (50 ppm for R-123). d. Second Alarm: 500 ppm. e. Mounting Height: 1 ft. f. Effective Radius: 20 ft. g. Temperature Range: 32 to 100 deg F. h. Duct or wall mount as indicated. i. Outputs: BACnet, RS485, DPDT. j. NEMA 4X housing.
8. Carbon Monoxide Transmitters:
a. Resolution Level: 1 ppm. b. Resolution Range: 0-2000 ppm. c. First Alarm: 25 ppm. d. Second Alarm: 200 ppm. e. Mounting Height: 3-5 ft. f. Effective Radius: 50 ft. g. Temperature Range: -10 to 100 deg F. h. Wall mount. i. Outputs: BACnet, RS485, DPDT.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 21 OF 48
F. Flow Monitoring:
1. Air Flow Monitoring:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Air Monitor Corp. 2) Ebtron, Inc. 3) Tek-Air Systems, Inc.
b. Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Stations:
1) At the inlet of each fan and near the exit of the inlet sound trap, airflow traverse probes shall be provided that shall continuously monitor the fan air volumes and system velocity pressure. 2) Each traverse probe shall be of a dual manifolded, cylindrical, Type 3003 extruded aluminum configuration, having an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction. The multiple total pressure manifold shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching airflow. The manifold should not have forward projecting sensors into the air stream. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tops on the opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as +20 deg in the approaching air stream. 3) The airflow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presence in the air stream. Each airflow-measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing.
c. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations:
1) Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results in accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation Handbook. 2) Airflow measuring stations shall be fabricated of 14-gauge galvanized steel welded casing with 90 degree connecting flanges in configuration and size equal to that of the duct into which it is mounted. Each station shall be complete with an air directionalizer and parallel cell profile suppressor (3/4" maximum cell) across the entering air stream and mechanically fastened to the casing in such a way to withstand velocities up to 6000 feet per minute. This air directionalizer and parallel cell honeycomb suppressor shall provide 98% free area, equalize the velocity profile, and eliminate turbulent and rotational flow from the air stream prior to the measuring point. 3) The total pressure measurement side (high side) will be designed and spaced to the Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition, Page 9-5. The self- averaging manifolding will be manufactured of brass and copper components.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 22 OF 48
4) The static pressure sensing probes (low side) shall be bullet-nosed shaped, per detailed radius, as illustrated in Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition, Page 9-5. 5) The main take-off point from both the total pressure and the static pressure manifolds must be symmetrical. 6) Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for connection to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each unit casing, listing model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity. 7) Installation Considerations:
a) The maximum allowable pressure loss through the flow and static pressure elements shall not exceed .065" w.c. at 1000 feet per minute, or .23" w.c. at 2000 feet per minute. Each unit shall measure the airflow rate within an accuracy of plus 2% as determined by U.S. – GSA certification tests, and shall contain a minimum of one total pressure sensor per 36 square inches of unit measuring area. b) The units shall have a self-generated sound rating of less than NC40, and the sound level within the duct shall not be amplified nor shall additional sound be generated. c) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork. d) Where control dampers are shown as part of the airflow measuring station, opposed blade precision controlled volume dampers integral to the station and complete with actuator, pilot positioner, and linkage shall be provided. e) Stations shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s published requirements, and in accordance with ASME Guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
2. Static Pressure Traverse Probe:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ebtron, Inc. 2) MAMAC Systems, Inc. 3) Veris Industries.
b. The probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along the exterior surface of the cylindrical probe. c. Size: 75% of duct width.
3. Shielded Static Air Probe:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ebtron, Inc. 2) MAMAC Systems, Inc. 3) Veris Industries.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 23 OF 48
b. The probe shall have multiple sensing ports, an impulse suppression chamber, and airflow shielding. A suitable probe for indoor and outdoor locations shall be provided.
4. Water Flow Monitoring:
a. Manufacturers:
1) AC Corp., Controlotron. 2) Badger Meter. 3) EMCO Flow Systems; Division of Advanced Energy Company. 4) Invensys Process System, Inc., Foxboro. 5) Onicon, Inc. 6) Rosemount, Emerson Process Controls. 7) Spirax Sarco, Inc. 8) Veris Industries.
b. Liquid Flow Meters:
1) Sensing: Electromagnetic. 2) Converter: Integral microprocessor-based. 3) Accuracy: +/- 0.2%. 4) ANSI Class: 150 or 300 to match piping system. 5) Maximum Temperature: 302 deg F. 6) Material: Epoxy-coated steel tube with stainless steel probes. 7) Output: 4-20 mA, programmable pulse. 8) Input: Keypad. 9) Enclosure: NEMA 4.
G. Power Monitoring Devices:
1. Current Measurement (amps):
a. Manufacturers:
1) Schneider Electric. 2) Setra Systems, Inc. 3) Veris Industries.
b. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System. c. Current Transformer: A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps.
1) Operating Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz. 2) Insulation: 0.6 kV Class 10Kv BIL. 3) UL recognized. 4) Five amp secondary. 5) Select current ration as appropriate for application.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 24 OF 48
d. Current Transducer: A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include:
1) 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps. 2) Manufactured to UL 1244. 3) Accuracy: +.5%, ripple +1%. 4) Minimum Load Resistance: 30 kOhm. 5) Input: 0-20 amps. 6) Output: 4-20 mA. 7) Transducer shall be powered by a 24 Vdc regulated power supply (24 Vdc +5%).
H. Status and Safety Switches:
1. General Requirements:
a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the BMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment.
2. Current Sensing Switches:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Schneider Electric. 2) Setra Systems, Inc. 3) Veris Industries.
b. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid-state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range. c. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads. d. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status.
3. Air Filter Status Switches:
a. Differential pressure switches used to monitor air filter status shall be of the automatic reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120 Vac. b. A complete installation kit shall be provided, including static pressure tops, tubing, fittings, and air filters. c. Provide appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
4. Air Flow Switches:
a. Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated mercury switches or snap acting micro-switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 25 OF 48
5. Air Pressure Safety Switches:
a. Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120 Vac. b. Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
6. Low Temperature Limit (Freeze) Switches:
a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with double pole/single throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120 Vac. b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to the coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the air stream.
7. Door Status Switches:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Primary controls manufacturer. 2) Honeywell Security. 3) TSI Incorporated. 4) Vaisala Group.
b. Magnetic Contact: 3/8" diameter miniature press fit. c. Magnet: 3/4" long. d. Standard Gap: 1-1/4". e. Leads: 12".
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Local Control Panels:
1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BAS manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door and slotted flush latch. 2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices such as relays, transducers, and so forth that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush-mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted. 3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provided via removable or fixed screw terminals. 4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300 volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring. 5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped. 6. A convenience 120 Vac duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 26 OF 48
B. Power Supplies:
1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply. 2. Input: 120 Vac +10%, 60 Hz. 3. Output: 24 Vdc. 4. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change. 5. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change. 6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak. 7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the power supply. 8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.
2.6 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole. c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole. d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole).
2. Boiler Emergency Switches: Provide pre-printed boiler emergency faceplate and gray switch handle. Provide interior switches with Lexan cover with 9 volt battery powered 95 dB nuisance horn, clear color with custom labeling.
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
D. Manual Timer Switches, 120 volt, 20 A:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MH Rhodes, Mark-Time, 93 Series or comparable product by one of the following:
a. General Electric. b. Intermatic, FF Series c. MH Rhodes, Mark-Time, 93 Series
2. Time Period: Coordinate time period with Owner, Engineer and application.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 27 OF 48
2.7 BREAK-GLASS EMERGENCY SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA 4X and UL A600.
B. Switches, 600 V, 10 A:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Intec Controls, I-EBG1-2 or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Honeywell Analytics H8-EMBG b. Intec Controls, I-EBG1 c. Veris, ST120
2. Accessories:
a. Hammer on a secure chain b. NO and NC contacts c. 5 spare discs, minimum
2.8 ACTUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Danaher Motion, Thompson. 3. NEP, Inc.; Neptronic.
B. Electronic Damper Actuators:
1. Size for torque required for damper seal at load conditions. 2. Coupling: V-bolt dual nut clamp with a V-shaped, toothed cradle. 3. Paralleling: Mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase torque as required. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry without the use of end switches to prevent any damage to the actuator during a stall condition. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism or internal capacitors. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position): 24 Vac. 7. Power Requirements (Proportional): Maximum 10 VA at 24 Vac or 8 W at 24 Vdc. 8. Proportional actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, position feedback and running time shall be factory or field programmable by use of external computer software. Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload and mechanical travel. Programming shall be through an EEPROM without the use of actuator mounted switches. 9. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122 deg F. 10. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA Type 2 / IP54 mounted in any orientation. 11. Agency Listing: ISO 9001, cULus, and CSA C22.2 No. 24-93.
C. Electronic Valve Actuators:
1. Size for torque required for valve close off at 150% of total system (head) pressure for two-way valves; and 100% of pressure differential across the valve or 100% of total system (pump) head differential pressure for 3-way valves. 2. Coupling: Directly couple end mount to stem, shaft, or ISO-style direct-coupled mounting pad.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 28 OF 48
3. Paralleling: Mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase torque as required. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry without the use of end switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism or internal capacitors. 6. Power Requirements: Maximum 10 VA at 24 Vac or 8 W at 24 Vdc. 7. Maximum 1 VA at 24 Vac or 1 W at 24 Vdc. 8. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122 deg F. 9. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA Type 2 / IP54 mounted in any orientation. 10. Agency Listing: ISO 9001, cULus, and CSA C22.2 No. 24-93.
D. Terminal Unit Actuators:
1. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: 200 psi. 2. Coupling: V-bolt dual nut clamp with a V-shaped, toothed cradle or an ISO-style direct- coupled mounting pad. 3. Power Requirements: Maximum 1 VA at 24 Vac or 1 W at 24 Vdc. 4. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122 deg F -30 to +50 deg C. 5. Housing Rating: Minimum UL94-5V(B) flammability. 6. Agency Listing: CE, UL 60730-1A/-2-14, CAN/CSA E60730-1, CSA C22.2 No. 24-93, CE according to 89/336/EEC.
E. Industrial Actuators:
1. The combination of valve and actuator shall meet the close-off requirements as specified in Section "Butterfly Valves." 2. Coupling: ISO 5211 mounting standards. 3. Overload Protection: A self resetting thermal switch embedded in the motor. 4. Manual Override: Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel or shaft for manual override to permit operation of the actuator in the event of an electrical power failure. 5. Auxiliary Switches: 2 SPDT rated 3 A at 250 Vac. 6. Temperature Rating: -4 to +150 deg F -20 to +65 deg C. 7. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA Type 4X/ IP67. Actuator shall have an internal heater. A visual indication beacon shall indicate position status of the device. 8. Agency Listing: ISO, CE, CSA.
2.9 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Match DDC control system manufacturer. 2. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 3. NEP, Inc.; Neptronic.
B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Select control valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 3. For Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Grooved-End Piping, Except Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 29 OF 48
D. Characterized Control Valves:
1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Nickel-plated forged brass body rated at no less than 400 psi, stainless steel ball and blowout proof stem, female NPT end fittings, with a dual EPDM O-ring packing design, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats, and a TEFZEL flow characterizing disc. 2. NPS 3/4" and Smaller for Terminal Units: Nickel-plated forged brass body rated at no less than 600 psi, chrome-plated brass ball and blowout proof stem, female NPT end fittings, with a dual EPDM O-Ring packing design, fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats.
E. Sizing for Hydronic Valves:
1. Two-Position: Line size or size using a pressure differential of 1 psi.
a. Applies to Three-Way Diverting Valves for Changeover between Heating and Cooling
2. Two-Way Modulating: 5 psig or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. 3. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than 3 psig.
F. Hydronic System Pressure Independent Control Valves:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Forged brass body rated at 400 psi, chrome-plated brass ball and stem, female NPT union ends, dual EPDM lubricated O-rings and a brass or TEFZEL characterizing disc. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body according to ANSI Class 125, standard Class B, stainless steel ball and blowout proof stem, flange to match ANSI 125 with a dual EPDM O-ring packing design, PTFE seats, and a stainless steel flow characterizing disc. 3. Accuracy: The control valves shall accurately control the flow from 0 to 100% full rated flow with an operating pressure differential range of 5 to 50 psi differential across the valve with a valve body accuracy of +/-5% variance due to differential pressure fluctuation, manufacturing tolerances and valve hysteresis. 4. Flow Characteristics: Equal percentage characteristics.
G. Steam system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ANSI Class 250 bronze body; stainless steel seat, stem and plug; and a TFE packing. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ANSI Class 125 cast-iron body; stainless steel seat, stem and plug; and a TFE V-ring packing. 3. Flow Characteristics: Linear or equal percentage characteristics. 4. Close-Off Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
H. Butterfly Valves, Resilient Seat:
1. NPS 2 to 12: Valve body shall be full lugged cast iron 200 psig body with a 304 stainless steel disc, EPDM seat, extended neck and shall meet ANSI Class 125/150 flange standards. Disc-to-stem connection shall utilize an internal spline. External mechanical methods to achieve this mechanical connection, such as pins or screws, are not acceptable. The shaft shall be supported at four locations by RPTFE bushings. 2. NPS 14 and Larger: Valve body shall be full lugged cast iron 150 psig body with a 304 stainless steel disc, EPDM seat, extended neck and shall meet ANSI Class 125/150
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 30 OF 48
flange standards. Disc-to-stem connection shall utilize a dual-pin method to prevent the disc from settling onto the liner. The shaft shall be supported at four locations by RPTFE bushings. 3. Sizing:
a. Two-Position: Line size or size using a pressure differential of 1 psi. b. Modulating: 3 psig or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. Size for the design flow with the disc in a 60 degree open-position with the design velocity less than 12 feet per second.
4. Close-Off Pressure Rating: NPS 2-12, 200 psi bubble tight shut-off. NPS 14 and larger, 150 psi bubble tight shut-off.
I. Two-Position (On/Off) Valves:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Forged brass body rated at no less than 300 psi, stainless steel stem, female, NPT union or sweat with a stainless steel stem and EPDM seals. 2. Sizing:
a. Two-Position: Line size or size using a pressure differential of 1 psi.
3. Close-Off Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150% of total system head pressure for 2-way valves and 125% of the design pressure differential across the 3-way valves. 4. The actuator shall be the same manufacturer as the valve, integrally mounted to the valve at the factory.
J. Pre-Piped Coil Connection Kits:
1. Supply Side Components: Isolation ball valve, manual air vent, strainer, drain, pressure independent control valve, P/T port, stainless or bronze braided flexible hose, union fitting. 2. Return Side Components: Union fitting with a P/T port, stainless or bronze braided flexible hose, isolation ball valve, manual air vent, P/T port. 3. Refer to documents for additional information on components and component arrangement. 4. Component Integration: Valving components can be integrated into multi-function devices except for the control valve. 5. Flexible Hose Length: 24" minimum; 48" maximum.
2.10 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 31 OF 48
B. Ratings:
1. Leakage: Damper shall have a maximum leakage of 10 cfm/sq. ft. at1" w.g. for a 12" wide damper and shall be AMCA licensed as Class 1A. 2. Differential Pressure: Damper shall have a maximum differential pressure rating of 13" w.g. for a 12" blade. 3. Velocity: Damper shall have a maximum velocity rating of 6,000 fpm. 4. Temperature: Damper shall be rated for 250 deg. F.
C. Construction:
1. Frame: 5 inches x minimum 16 gage roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gage U-channel. 2. Blades:
a. Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece. b. Action for Two Position Dampers: Parallel. c. Action for Modulating Dampers: Opposed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. e. Material: Minimum 16 gage equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. f. Width: Nominal 6 inches.
3. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 4. Seals:
a. Blade: Extruded neoprene type for ultra-low leakage from 250 deg. F. Mechanically attached to blade edge. b. Jamb: Flexible metal compression type.
5. Linkage: In frame. 6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. 7. Finish: Mill galvanized.
2.11 DAMPER ACCESSORIES
A. End Switch Package:
1. Two-position indicator switches linked directly to damper blade to remotely indicate damper blade position.
B. Flange Frame: Minimum 6 inches x 1-3/8 inches x 0.125 inch aluminum, bolt holes in corners.
1. Mates To: TDC, TDF, Ductmate, Nexus, Ward, and other T-flange duct connections. 2. Performance: Maximum free area and lowest pressure drop.
C. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gage thickness, minimum 12 inches length.
D. Duct Transition Connection: Round, oval or rectangular to match duct connections.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 32 OF 48
2.12 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A. Cable Manufacturers:
1. Avaya Inc. 2. Belden Inc.; Electronics Division. 3. CommScope Properties, LLC. 4. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 5. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc. 6. KRONE Incorporated. 7. Mohawk/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 8. Nordex/CDT; a Subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 9. Remee Products Corp. 10. Superior Essex; Superior Telecommunications Inc. 11. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
B. Terminal and Connector Component Manufacturers:
1. AMP; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. 2. Amphenol Corporation. 3. Avaya Inc. 4. Connect-Tech Products. 5. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 6. Homaco. 7. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 8. KRONE Incorporated. 9. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 10. Lucent Technologies; Global Service Provider. 11. Mohawk/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 12. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Incorporated. 13. Nordex/CDT; a Subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 14. Panduit Corp. 15. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
C. 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 AWG. 2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIA/EIA-568 B.2, Categories 5e and 6. 3. NFPA 70, Type CMR complying with UL 1666. 4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Categories 5e and 6. 3. NFPA 70, Types CMG and CMP. 4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
F. Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 33 OF 48
1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jackets where indicated. 2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
G. Patch Panel: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, meeting or exceeding cable performance. Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
H. Jack and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. Use keyed jacks for data service.
I. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch lengths; terminated with RJ-45 plug at each end. Use keyed plugs for data service.
2.13 REFRIGERANT DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Description of Work: Provide all labor, materials, product, equipment and service to install a complete refrigerant detection and control system. Provide and install a complete networked refrigerant detection and control system and connect to main mechanical room equipment including chillers, associated exhaust fans, etc. Interface into BMS. Provide all work as indicated on plans and diagrams
1. Referenced Standards
a. All products shall be certified to CSA/UL Standards. b. Manufacturing facility shall be audited and certified to ISO 9001:2008.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Acme. 2. Armstrong. 3. Tox-Net; Toxalert International, Inc. (Basis of Design).
C. The refrigerant sensor(s) shall have a 4 to 20 mA output signal over its (0-500) PPM range. When a sensor malfunctions it shall signal the controller for annunciation of sensor failure.
D. The controller/annunciator shall be Model Tox-Refrig (Basis of Design) or purchaser approved equal. The controller/annunciator shall be designed to be mounted outside of the mechanical room and shall have two (2) modes of control with two (2) levels of indication for each sensor input. The first mode, "warning," shall start the mechanical room ventilation equipment, if not already operational through BMS. The second mode, "alarm," shall light a red alarm light and sound the audible alarm port of the alarm. The audible alarm after being silenced, shall automatically reset and sound again at the next alarm occurrence. There shall be a light emitting diode (LED) for each refrigerant sensor to indicate warning stage, alarm stage, or sensor malfunction.
E. Per ASHRAE Std. 15-1994, there shall be a "purge" switch mounted on the face of the controller. The switch shall over-ride automatic control and manually activate the warning stage and ventilation equipment.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 34 OF 48
F. The controller shall have dry relay contacts for both the warning and alarm stages to control ventilation equipment and or interface to the facility BMS.
G. The controller panel front shall include the following labeled indicator lights and control switches:
1. Power to system light. 2. Labeled LED indicator for each sensor input 3. LED lights green when warning level is sensed. 4. LED lights red when alarm level is sensed. 5. LED flashes red when sensor fault is detected. 6. Audible alarm with silence push-button. 7. Purge switch to manually control the mechanical room ventilation equipment from off into “Normal Mode”, or “Normal Mode” into “Emergency Mode”.
H. Microprocessor shall be based on Model Tox-Refrig/ANA (Basis-of-Design) or purchaser approved equal. Provide a microprocessor based refrigerant leak detection sensor to monitor for refrigerant leaks. The sensing element shall be solid state metal oxide semiconductor for long life and stability. The sensor shall be powered by 24 VDC and have a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to the refrigerant level being detected. When the microprocessor detects a malfunction it shall drive its output to zero to signal the controllers of a sensor failure.
I. The sensor shall be housed in an explosion proof housing and have two meter terminal connections on the face of the unit for ease of checking unit calibration.
J. The refrigerant leak detection Basis of Design system shall be as manufactured by Toxalert International, represented by Flow Tech Inc. or approved by this specifying engineer.
K. System shall be provided with the following options:
1. Digital value display for indication of refrigerant concentrations in PPM.
a. Provide a LCD digital value display on the face of the controller to display the sensor sensing the highest concentration of refrigerant. Provide a push-button on the face of the panel for each sensor input so an operator can read the value of each sensor when its respective push-button is pushed. The display shall read in PPM (parts per million) of refrigerant.
2. Horn and Strobe.
a. Provide minimum four (4) remote horn/ strobe to be furnished with the refrigerant monitoring system; 120 VAC, red.
3. Industrial Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
a. Provide wall mounted SCBA, NIOSH approved, with a cabinet for wall mounting inside mechanical room.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 35 OF 48
2.14 LEAK DETECTION INSTRUMENTS
A. Point-Type, Leak-Detection Switches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Veris Industries. b. W.E. Anderson; Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
2. Features: Audible and visual alarm with relay output for remote indication. 3. Alarm activated based on change in resistance. 4. Performance:
a. Service: Water. b. Temperature Limits: 32 to 122 deg F. c. Switch Type: SPDT relay. d. Electric Connection: Cable attached.
5. Construction: Acrylic, ABS plastic. 6. Field Power: 24-V ac or dc.
B. Cable-Type, Leak-Detection Switches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Veris Industries. b. W.E. Anderson; Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
2. Control Module Features:
a. Power and alarm LEDs. b. Alarm test switch. c. Continuous tape integrity self check.
3. Performance:
a. Service: Water, or other conductive liquid. b. Switch Type: DPDT. c. Electric Connection: Screw terminals. d. Conduit Connection: 0.5 inch.
4. Construction:
a. Control Module Enclosure: Extruded aluminum. b. Tape: Hydrophobic with connector on each end. c. Tape Length: 60 inches, 10 feet, 15 feet or 25 feet. Size based on required length in field. Field extendable.
5. Field Power: 24-V ac or 24- to 30-V dc.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 36 OF 48
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA/EIA-568-B.3, and TIA/EIA-569- A.
3.2 TAB SUPPORT
A. Pre-TAB Meeting: Approximately 2 weeks prior to the initiation of Division 23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC" services on site, schedule a meeting giving notice to the Construction Manager, Architect and Engineer and facilities representative(s).
1. Publish an agenda with a minimum of the following discussion items:
a. "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC" sequence of upcoming construction. b. "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC" sequence of upcoming construction. c. TAB for support from "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC." d. "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC" requirements for support from TAB. e. Timing, support and documentation procedures. f. Operation, diversities and setpoints of systems and equipment.
B. Division 23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC" shall fully support Division 23 "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC" in the testing and calibration of all devices with fluid flow, motor transformers, static pressures and the like and shall coordinate work so as to not interfere with instrumentation and controls installation and setup activities.
C. Division 23 "Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC" shall fully support Division 23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC" in the operation, start and stop of all systems as well as the setting of values required for proper balancing and shall coordinate work so as to not interfere with TAB activities.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION/COMMISSIONING ACCESS ACCOUNT
A. Individual read/view only web based access accounts shall be provided to the Engineer and to the Commissioning Agent. Account shall be set up once on-site server/workstation is active and pertinent access username, password, information and instructions shall be emailed to the Engineer and to the Commissioning Agent as early in the project as possible. Minimum read/view only access shall be provided to the following:
1. Graphics. 2. Programming. 3. Trend Data. 4. Alarms.
3.4 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that power supply is available for control units and operator workstation.
B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.
C. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 37 OF 48
1. Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed complying with EMI clearance requirements. 2. Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using products labeled for type of wall penetrated. 3. Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures is adequate for each pathway. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the floor Coordinate device height with interior architectural details. Install at maximum 60 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.
E. Mechanical Contractor to install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.
G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
I. Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."
J. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 38 OF 48
K. Pre-Piped Coil Connection Kits:
1. Pressure independent control valves may be provided as part of a pre-manufactured pipe package at coil connections for piping specified at NPS 1-1/4" and smaller only where concealed from view above accessible ceiling construction.
L. Install boiler emergency switches for each boiler room at each interior and exterior entrance/exit.
1. Labels: Install labels according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 2. Interior: Install near each doorway on the outside of the room with a horn and cover. 3. Exterior: Install near each doorway on the inside of the boiler room. 4. Public Areas: Where the switch(es) would be subject to possible tampering, review with the Authority Having Jurisdiction and upon obtaining AHJ approval, locate the switch(es) just inside of the door. 5. Operation: Switching any switch shall shut down all boilers in the room. 6. Mount at 60 inches AFF.
M. Install break glass "EMERGENCY CHILLER SHUT DOWN" and "EMERGENCY VENTILATION ACTIVATION" switches for chillers and chiller room ventilation systems at the primary entrance to each chiller room.
1. Labels: Install labels according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 2. Location: install near each doorway on the outside of the room. 3. Chiller Operation: Upon the glass breaking, all chillers in the room shall shut down. 4. Ventilation Operation: Upon the glass breaking, all ventilation systems in the room shall turn on.
N. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.
O. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
P. Properly support leak detection instruments, associated wiring, and associated conduit to manufacturer’s standards. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition. Comply with requirements in Division 26 specifications for electrical power connections.
3.6 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A. Backbone Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 for runs between cabinets.
B. Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 5e cable for runs between cabinets and peripheral equipment.
3.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 39 OF 48
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring and optical fiber in raceway within the following areas: mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, exposed areas, within walls and above inaccessible ceilings. Conceal raceway except in mechanical rooms and areas where other raceway and piping are exposed.
C. Wiring Method: Install wiring and optical fiber in raceway except consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces where unenclosed wiring method may be used for systems that are not part of life safety systems, including but not limited to, smoke exhaust systems, stair pressurization systems, smoke control systems, or hazardous exhaust systems, or systems on emergency/standby power, or main communications systems cable. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in mechanical rooms and areas where other raceway and piping are exposed.
D. Cable Installation:
1. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross- connect and patch panels. 3. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer’s written recommended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e or 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 5e or 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch of Categories 5e and 6 cables at connector terminations.
E. Separation from EMI Sources: Comply with BICSI TDM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation distances from possible sources of EMI:
1. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches.
2. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 40 OF 48
3. Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches.
4. Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches. 5. Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
F. Conduit:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull points, and for pull-box sizing. 2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible. 3. In mechanical rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard (in case of a single piece of plywood) or in the corner of room (where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room). Use cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 1 to 3 inches in finished floor. 4. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 5. Install exposed cable in raceway. 6. Install concealed cable in raceway. 7. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 8. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 9. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 10. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
G. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
H. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
I. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.
3.8 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 607.
B. Grounding Points:
1. Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet. 2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Mount on wall of equipment room and closet, with standoff insulators.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 41 OF 48
C. Bonding Conductors:
1. Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding busbars. 2. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in cabinets.
D. Special Requirements:
1. Bonding conductors shall be insulated copper, No. 6 AWG minimum. 2. Install only in nonmetallic conduit, unless specifically required for protection of conductor. Metallic conduit, if used, shall be RMC. For RMC that exceeds 36 inches in length, conductors shall be bonded at each end of conduit. 3. Bonding conductors shall be installed without splices unless approved by Architect because of special circumstances. Where splices are necessary, they shall be accessible and shall be located in telecommunications spaces. Splices shall be by irreversible compression connectors or by exothermic welding.
3.9 CAMPUS CONTROL AND MONITORING NETWORK
A. Connect to campus central control and monitoring systems. Provide all hardware, software, protocols and cabling required for a complete interface.
B. All interface, alarms, graphics, system control, editing, and other functionalities of this system shall be fully operable at the campus head end system.
C. Confirm restrictions and requirements with Owner for any campus IT backbone, campus standards, campus interfacing, etc.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 42 OF 48
4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument. 6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self- contained pressure regulators. 8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
E. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Administration class for this Project shall be Class 2 or 3. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
F. Using cable and asset management software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility’s architectural arrangement. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
G. Use logical and systematic designations for facility’s architectural arrangement and nomenclature, and a consistent color-coded identification of individual conductors.
H. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet.
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
I. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 43 OF 48
3.11 GRAPHICS ORGANIZATION
A. General:
1. Graphics shall be full color with motion utilizing floor plans wherever possible to indicate location of applicable information and fully accessible through the web-based software. 2. A general color scheme shall be utilized to indicate status of equipment and information.
a. BLUE: Equipment/system normal, off; point normal. b. GREEN: Equipment/system normal, on. c. YELLOW: Equipment/system alarm, operating; point minor alarm. d. RED: Equipment failure; point major alarm. e. PURPLE: Operator override.
3. Provide the following links in a block in the same general location on every graphic:
a. Primary graphic. b. All screens associated with the current graphic. c. As-Built Sequence of Operation d. Back to previous. e. Forward to next.
4. Organize graphics in easily understandable levels to minimize search time for desired information.
a. There shall be at least 2 levels and no more than 4 levels. b. Smaller systems can have one primary graphic with links to all other graphics. c. Larger systems can be organized with one primary graphic, a secondary set of categorized graphics to organize like specific graphics (i.e., zones, air systems, chilled water systems, hot water systems, etc.), then a third layer to take the user to specific graphics.
B. Primary Graphic:
1. The primary graphic will show well organized links to all other graphic levels with short descriptive labels. 2. Import the Owner’s logo and clearly show the project name.
C. Zone Graphics:
1. Provide floor plan based graphics to show zones. Organize in a similar fashion to Contract Drawings and provide a sufficient scale so all information is easily readable and understandable. 2. Provide links to all other zone graphics. 3. Provide links to all individual zone terminal equipment. 4. Show all zone terminal equipment information with blocks in the associated zone. Each block shall change color to indicate normal/alarm modes.
D. System Graphics:
1. Each discreet system shall have a single graphic organized in schematic form accurately representing the installation configuration.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 44 OF 48
2. Each system or piece of equipment that has been provided with 2-way communications such as through an RS 485 connection shall be provided with a dedicated graphic regardless of which contract it was provided under or if it was Owner/tenant provided. 3. Provide links to all associated graphics (i.e., AHU to other AHU’s and to exhaust systems, chilled water system to cooling tower system and hot water system). 4. Locate pertinent information next to its associated graphic representation. 5. Provide a link to a separate page that displays the system as-built sequence of operation.
E. Monitoring Graphics:
1. Where equipment is monitored for specific information and no 2-way communication is available, it may be grouped on a floor plan or multiple plans.
F. Energy Usage Graphics:
1. Provide separate graphics pages for the ongoing accountability of building energy usage and consumption over time. Building energy usage graphics shall be provided with hyperlinks to the main building graphics homepage to facilitate "user friendly" operations. 2. Provide dynamic historical trending and totalization of each piece of equipment (energy use of each component). Totalize data for the continuous monitoring of metering equipment for constant and variable motor loads, VFD operation, cooling loads, AHU energy usage (air-side), air and water-side economizers, air distribution static pressure and air ventilation volumes. 3. Monitor electrical system power and lighting system power consumption through each switchboard circuit breaker connection. Provide dynamic historical trending and totalization of each circuit. 4. Coordinate data (run-time hours, electrical consumption, kW hours, kW/ton, kWH/year, $savings/year, etc.) with building energy model and the Commissioning Agent.
G. Show the block in its general location with an equipment label and normal and alarm color changing.
H. Custom Graphics: Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as PCX, TIFF, and GEM. The graphics generation package also shall provide the capability of capturing or converting graphics from other programs such as Designer or AutoCAD.
I. Graphics Library: Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library also shall include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program.
3.12 PROGRAMMING
A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified sequences of operation and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.
B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. Use the following naming convention: AA.BBB.CCDDE where AA is used to designate the location of the point within the building, such as mechanical
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 45 OF 48
room, wing, or level, or the building itself in a multi-building environment, BBB is used to designate the mechanical system with which the point is associated (e.g., A01, HTG, CLG, LTG), CC represents the equipment or material referenced (e.g., SF for supply fan, RW for return water, EA for exhaust air, ZN for zone), D or DD may be used for clarification or for identification if more than one CC exists (e.g., SF10, ZNB), E represents the action or state of the equipment or medium (e.g., T for temperature, H for humidity, C for control, S for status, D for damper control, I for current).
C. Software Programming:
1. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system, but not specified in this document, also shall be provided by the Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of operation. Use the appropriate technique based on the following programming types:
a. Text-based:
1) Organized in single purpose blocks of programming. 2) Must provide actions for all possible situations. 3) Must be modular and structured. 4) Must be commented with a description and purpose.
b. Graphic-based:
1) Organized in single purpose functional blocks. 2) Must provide actions for all possible situations. 3) Organize blocks in a neat flowing structure. 4) Blocks must be annotated with a description and purpose in a text block. 5) Must be documented.
D. Operator Interface:
1. Standard Graphics: Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment. Point information on the graphic displays shall dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show relevant calculated points such as set points. 2. Show terminal equipment information on a "graphic" summary table. Provide dynamic information for each point shown. 3. The Contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot all operator interface software and its functions as described in this Section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface.
3.13 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Coordinate onsite time and integration of services with Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC" to utilize and mutually support activities. Air and
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 46 OF 48
water devices requiring flow information for calibration (i.e., VAV box, flow station/meters, etc.) shall be calibrated in conjunction with TAB activities and shall not interfere with the work and general schedule of construction. 2. Calibrate instruments. 3. Make single-point calibration test for accuracy, plus testing of full span for each analog instrument. 4. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 5. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.
6. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with single- point calibration accomplished at approximately mid-point of span, and check full span with an artificial signal generator. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
7. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at approximately mid-point of span, and check full span with an artificial signal generator. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum.
8. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at approximately mid-point of span using a precision-resistance source, and check full span with an artificial signal generator. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. 12. Leak Detection Instruments:
a. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation. b. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment. c. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's written recommendations.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 47 OF 48
d. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment. e. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer. f. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of- tolerance instruments. g. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated. h. Digital Signals:
1) Check digital signals using a jumper wire. 2) Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.
i. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY TESTING
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Category 5e UTP Cabling Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in Annex I, complying with measurement accuracy specified in Annex H. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. c. Wire-map test that reports open circuits, short circuits, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs, and improper terminations. d. Channel and permanent link tests for cable length, insertion loss, near-end crosstalk loss, power sum near-end crosstalk loss, equal-level far-end crosstalk loss, power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew. Performance shall comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Category 6 UTP Cabling Tests:
a. Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e, conducted from 1 to 250 MHz. b. Channel and permanent link tests shall be performed with at ester that complies with performance requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Level III. Include tests for longitudinal or transverse conversion loss. c. Performance shall comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
B. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PAGE 48 OF 48
C. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.15 STABILITY TRENDING SET-UP
A. Set up trending of points for confirmation of stability and control.
B. Trend three weeks of data as follows:
1. Trend all analog input values on a 30 minute basis. 2. Trend all digital input points on a change of value basis. 3. Trend all analog virtual points on a 60 minute basis.
C. Test network capacity according to standards indicated during trending tests.
D. When trending indicates system instability for certain points, set-up additional trending for one week as follows to facilitate tuning and trouble-shooting:
1. Trend all associated analog input points on a 10 minute basis. 2. Trend all associated digital input points on a change of value basis. 3. Trend all associated analog outputs on a 10 minute basis. 4. Trend all associated digital outputs on a change of value basis. 5. Trend all associated virtual analog points on a 10 minute basis. 6. Trend all associated virtual digital points on a change of value basis.
E. Reporting system shall automatically email trend reports to the Engineer and the Commissioning Agent on a daily basis.
F. Continue trending as long as required to enable system stability and trouble shooting. Owner's representative must sign off.
G. Leave trending of point as directed by Owner's representative for long term information gathering.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new outlets. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 1 OF 24
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems and equipment
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. O.A.: Outside air.
1.4 OVERVIEW
A. The following are descriptions of control sequences and operating parameters.
B. Once the system is in operation, some adjustment and "fine tuning" will be necessary to obtain optimum set points. Building Management System (BMS) shall permit field adjustment of new variable quantities to allow for "fine tuning".
C. The control system shall be performance tested, simulating all seasons and conditions. Correct and modify as required.
D. Clarification to automatic temperature controls:
1. Operator workstation to have graphic presentation for all sequences and systems. 2. Shafer Hall BMS system shall be interconnected to the campus BMS system, including all graphics.
1.5 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. The following items are common requirements that apply unless noted otherwise:
1. All set points shall be program adjustable at the operator workstation. 2. All high and low limits shall be alarmed. 3. All cooling coils located in or over occupied spaces shall have a condensate pan high level alarm. 4. All hydronic proof of flow shall be via current sensors. 5. All fan proof of operation shall be by high and low current sensors.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 2 OF 24
6. All unit smoke detection, freeze protection, high condensate level and other emergency shutdown shall be done by hardwired relay interlock and shall not rely on control system programming. 7. All dampers shall have open and close status indication through end switches or integral actuator feature. 8. All dampers shall have an independent control point. Multiple dampers of different applications (i.e., outdoor, return, relief) controlled from a single point are not acceptable. 9. All air handling systems with ducted outdoor air shall be provided with freeze protection. 10. All exhaust systems 2,000 cfm and over (except specialty exhaust such as grease exhaust), upon receiving a signal from the fire alarm system shall de-energize the fan and close the associated motorized damper. All systems shall be hardwired interlocked to the fire alarm system and shall not rely on control system programming. 11. Provide optimum morning warm-up for all air handling units. Prior to normal occupancy, the DDC system shall initiate optimum warm-up mode to bring spaces to normal operating conditions. When space set points are achieved, the system through the DDC shall switch to normal occupied mode. Optimal start program shall "learn" from previous days and shall fine tune based on outside air temperature. 12. The Point Naming Convention for this project shall be reviewed between the system ATC vendor and Owner for confirmation prior to execution of work. Naming conventions for systems, devices, or conditions not depicted above shall be agreed to between the ATC vendor and Owner. 13. Upon restoration of power after power failure, controls programming shall stage the start of all large equipment (ERU’s, AHU’s, pumps, etc.).
1.6 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM
A. System Description:
1. Two gas-fired condensing boilers provide heating hot water to the building. Each boiler is sized for approximately 2/3 of the full heating load of the building. Hot water is distributed to the building by a pair of variable speed run/standby secondary pumps, included as part of the Dual Temperature Loop Distribution. 2. Each boiler has a constant volume primary pump with EC motor.
B. Boiler Operation (B-1 & B-2):
1. Once building Dual Temperature loop is set to Heating Mode, boilers shall be allowed to start. 2. The boilers shall be enabled through the BMS. Boiler safeties, staging and modulation shall be controlled through the boiler control panel provided by the boiler manufacturer. System hot water temperature shall be based on the following reset schedule:
a. 150 deg F supply water temperature when outdoor air temperature is 20 deg F and below (adj.) b. 120 deg F supply water temperature when outdoor air temperature is 55 deg F (adj.) or greater.
3. Each boiler is equipped with a modulating burner. Boilers shall be cycled and gas burners shall be modulated by the packaged boiler controls to maintain heating hot water supply temperature.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 3 OF 24
4. Boiler staging shall be as follows:
a. The lead boiler shall modulate its burner as required to maintain hot water supply setpoint. b. The lag boiler shall remain off except as follows:
1) If the lead boiler fails, as determined by failure alarm obtained from the burner management controls provided by the boiler manufacturer, then the lag boiler shall then become the lead boiler and the BMS system shall initiate an alarm. 2) If the outdoor air temperature is 10 deg F or below, the lag boiler shall start and allowed to run for 30 minutes every 4 hours. 3) If the lead boiler is operating at maximum firing rate and the hot water supply temperature falls 10 degrees F (adj.) below setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) then lag boiler shall be energized. Reverse sequence shall occur as heating demand decreases.
5. B-1 shall be the lead boiler with B-2 as the lag boiler. Boiler manufacturer’s controls to switch lead and lag boiler positions every quarter. (adj.) 6. Control of burner lighting, flame control of burner lighting, flame safeguard and firing rate shall be by burner manufacturer provided hard-wired control systems, not the BMS. The BMS shall monitor boiler safeguard and low water condition. 7. Boiler and Burner Emergency Shutdown Control: Interrupt each burner safety circuit to turn off the boiler/burner unit by a manually-operated remote shutdown switch. Switches shall have red face plate with white lettering indicating “Burner Emergency Shutoff” and be properly rated for voltage. Switches shall be hardwired to boiler and burner controls.
C. Primary Circulating Pumps (HWP-1 & HWP-2): System starts and stops pumps to match operation of associated boiler. If pump fails to start as commanded, disable associated boiler, start lag boiler, and signal alarm.
1. Provide 0-10 VDC connection between boiler and associated primary pump to allow pump to adjust EC motor speed based on boiler output.
D. Secondary Distribution Pumps (DTP-1 & DTP-2): Hot water distribution to terminal equipment coils is after the connection to the building two-pipe, dual temperature loop. See Dual Temperature Loop controls later in this section.
E. Two-Pipe Dual Temperature Loop Sequence Coordination: Boilers shall not be enabled while Dual Temperature Loop is set to Cooling Mode. See Dual Temperature Loop controls later in this section.
F. Operator Workstation Display: Display the following data:
1. System graphic. 2. Boiler enable/disable (typical of 2) 3. Boiler alarm status (typical of 2) 4. Boiler burner status (typical of 2) 5. Supply water temperature sensor. 6. Supply water temperature setpoint. 7. Return water temperature sensor(s). 8. Hot water pump operating status (typical of 2) 9. Hot water pump start/stop (typical of 2)
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 4 OF 24
10. Signal between boiler and associated primary pump (typical of 2) 11. Dual temperature pump operating status (typical of 2, shared) 12. Dual temperature pump start/stop (typical of 2, shared) 13. Dual temperature pump VFD speed (typical of 2, shared) 14. Dual temperature pump VFD alarm (typical of 2, shared) 15. Differential pressure set point(s) for primary hot water system. 16. Differential pressure sensor(s) for primary hot water system. 17. System BTU/H for hot water system (shared) 18. Totalized BTU for hot water system (shared) 19. Dual temperature loop Heating or Cooling mode indication (shared)
1.7 CHILLED WATER COOLING SYSTEM
A. System Description:
1. The chilled water cooling system consists of two electric screw chillers with variable speed compressors, and a two cell cooling tower outside. The two chillers and two cell cooling tower are sized to handle the building load, with minor redundancy. 2. Primary chilled water pumps and condenser water pumps adjust speed to maintain minimum required flow through each chiller to maintain chilled water temperature setpoint. 3. Chilled water is distributed through distribution pumps in the dual-temperature loop.
B. Chiller System Startup: System starts primary chilled water pumps and proves flow through chiller before allowing chiller to start. Allow system to start when the following conditions are met:
1. Once building Dual Temperature loop is set to Cooling Mode, pumps and chillers shall be allowed to start. 2. System proves water is present in cooling tower sump. 3. System detects outside temperature is above 50 deg F. 4. System indicates cooling demand from building Fan Coil Units or Air Handling Units, and/or dehumidification of outside air at Energy Recovery Units.
C. Chilled Water System Temperature Control: Chillers shall operate using factory variable speed controls to maintain supply temperature at 42 deg F (adjustable).
D. Chiller Sequencing: Sequence chillers as lead/lag, according to the following:
1. The lead chiller compressors shall run to maintain chilled water supply set point. 2. The lag chiller shall remain off until lead chiller is operating at 90% of maximum capacity orand the chilled water supply temperature falls 4 degrees F (adj.) above below set point for a period of 10 minutes (adj.), whichever happens first, then lag chiller shall be energized. Reverse sequence shall occur as cooling demand decreases. 3. CH-1 shall be the lead chiller and CH-2 as the lag chiller. BMS shall switch lead and lag chiller positions every quarter (adj.).
E. Chilled Water Primary Pumps (CHWP-1 & CHWP-2): Pumps shall operate on a run/standby sequence with automatic changeover, according to the following schedule:
1. Pumps shall be enabled at all times while Dual Temperature Loop is set to Cooling Mode (adj.). 2. Start lag pump automatically upon failure of lead pump and signal alarm
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 5 OF 24
3. Duty cycle lead/lag pumps based on run time. 4. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed to maintain set point at remote differential pressure sensors at end of system. Primary pumps shall vary speed between minimum flow and design flow. 5. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed with sequencing of lead/lag chillers. 6. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed to maintain required minimum flow at each chiller. Coordinate with manufacturer’s listed values for the purchased equipment.
F. Cooling Tower System Startup: System starts condenser water pumps and proves flow through cooling tower before allowing cooling tower to start. Allow system to start when the following conditions are met:
1. Once building Dual Temperature loop is set to Cooling Mode, pumps and cooling tower shall be allowed to start. 2. System proves water is present in cooling tower sump. 3. System detects outside temperature is above 50 deg F. 4. System indicates cooling demand from building Fan Coil Units or Air Handling Units, and/or dehumidification of outside air at Energy Recovery Units.
G. Condenser Water System Temperature Control: Cooling tower shall modulate fan speed to maintain condenser water temperature.
1. On initial demand, fan speed shall modulate to maintain condenser water setpoint. 2. On decreased demand, reverse above sequence. On reduced demand from initial demand operation, turn off fan and open two-way bypass valve.
H. Condenser Water Primary Pumps (CWP-1 & CWP-2): Pumps shall operate on a run/standby sequence with automatic changeover, according to the following schedule:
1. Pumps shall be enabled at all times while Dual Temperature Loop is set to Cooling Mode (adj.). 2. Start lag pump automatically upon failure of lead pump and signal alarm. 3. Duty cycle lead/lag pumps based on run time. 4. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed to maintain set point at remote differential pressure sensors at end of system. 5. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed to maintain required minimum flow at each chiller. Coordinate with manufacturer’s listed values for the purchased equipment.
I. Cooling Tower Electric Basin Heater: When basin temperature reaches 40 deg F (adj.), basin heater shall energize to maintain water temperature.
J. Cooling Tower Vibration Switch: Switch shall signal an alarm to BMS and shut down the cooling tower fan on sensing excessive vibration. See section “23 65 00 – Cooling Towers”. During vibration alarm condition, shut down active chillers.
K. Condenser Water Filter System: Monitor control panel and high tank level alarm status. BMS to start and stop side stream filter.
L. Secondary Distribution Pumps (DTP-1 & DTP-2): Chilled water distribution to terminal equipment coils is after the connection to the building two-pipe, dual temperature loop. See Dual Temperature Loop controls later in this section.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 6 OF 24
M. Two-Pipe Dual Temperature Loop Sequence Coordination: Chillers and Cooling Tower shall not be enabled while Dual Temperature Loop is set to Heating Mode. See Dual Temperature Loop controls later in this section.
N. Operator Workstation Display: Display the following data:
1. System graphic. 2. Chiller status (typical of 2). 3. Chiller enable/disable (typical of 2). 4. Chiller VFC speed (typical of 2). 5. Chiller VFC alarm status (typical of 2). 6. Chiller entering chilled water temperature (typical of 2). 7. Chiller leaving chilled water temperature (typical of 2). 8. Chiller leaving chilled water temperature set point. 9. Chiller evaporator differential pressure (typical of 2). 10. Chiller entering condenser water temperature (typical of 2). 11. Chiller leaving condenser water temperature (typical of 2). 12. Chiller condenser differential pressure (typical of 2). 13. Chilled water pump start/stop (typical of 2). 14. Chilled water pump operating status (typical of 2). 15. Chilled water pump VFD speed (typical of 2). 16. Chilled water pump VFD alarm (typical of 2). 17. Chiller chilled water flow rate (typical of 2). 18. System chilled water flow rate. 19. System chilled water supply temperature. 20. System chilled water return temperature. 21. Cooling tower cell status (typical of 2). 22. Cooling tower cell fan enable/disable (typical of 2). 23. Cooling tower cell sump level (typical of 2). 24. Condenser water temperature set point. 25. Condenser water system supply temperature. 26. Condenser water system return temperature. 27. Condenser water bypass control valve position (typical of 2). 28. Condenser water pump start/stop (typical of 2). 29. Condenser water pump operating status (typical of 2). 30. Condenser water pump VFD speed (typical of 2). 31. Condenser water pump VFD alarm (typical of 2). 32. Condenser water filter alarm status. 33. Condenser water filter system enable/disable. 34. Differential pressure set point(s) for primary chilled water and condenser water systems. 35. Differential pressure sensor(s) for primary chilled water and condenser water systems. 36. System BTU/H for chilled water system (shared) 37. Totalized BTU for chilled water system (shared) 38. Dual temperature loop Heating or Cooling Mode indication (shared)
1.8 DUAL TEMPERATURE CHANGEOVER AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. System Description:
1. Building piping distribution outside of main mechanical room is set up as a two-pipe, dual temperature loop. Building shall adjust three-way control valve to change between heating season and cooling season. Variable speed distribution pumps shall deliver hot
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 7 OF 24
or chilled water (depending on season) to the terminal equipment coils throughout the building. 2. Hydraulic separator separates primary and secondary loops.
B. Seasonal System Changeover: Three-way control valve shall switch the dual temperature loop between heating and cooling seasons. The system changeover shall be set on the following schedule:
1. Seasonal changeover shall be a manual input from building facilities. 2. When outside air temperature falls to 60°F, send alarm to BMS to recommend switching building loop to Heating Mode. 3. When outside air temperature rises above 65°F, send alarm to BMS to recommend switching building loop to Cooling Mode. 4. Heating Mode:
a. Once Heating Mode is manually initiated by facilities, disable chillers and cooling tower. Primary chilled water pumps and distribution pumps shall run and allow chilled water and dual temperature loop temperature to rise up to ambient temperature (70°F adj.). This is to prevent chilled water from flowing through the boilers. b. System shall close chilled water side and open hot water side when Heating Mode is activated. Hot water system equipment (such as boilers) shall be enabled once system has changed over to Heating Mode. While system is in Heating Mode, chilled water system equipment (such as chillers and cooling tower) shall not be allowed to start. See Hot Water Heating System controls earlier in this section.
1) Heating Only Equipment: Where equipment has only a hot water coil and no chilled water coil (such as radiation, reheat coils and cabinet unit heaters), the associated branch control valves shall be fully open during Heating Mode operation. Locations indicated on floor plans.
5. Cooling Mode:
a. Once Cooling Mode is manually initiated by facilities, disable boilers. Primary hot water pumps and distribution pumps shall run and allow hot water and dual temperature loop temperature to fall down to ambient temperature (70°F adj.). This is to prevent hot water from flowing through the chillers. b. System shall close hot water side and open chilled water side when Cooling Mode is activated. Chilled water system equipment (such as chillers and cooling tower) shall be enabled once system has changed over to Cooling Mode. While system is in Cooling Mode, hot water system equipment (such as boilers) shall not be allowed to start. See Chilled Water Cooling System controls earlier in this section.
1) Heating Only Equipment: Where equipment has only a hot water coil and no chilled water coil (such as radiation, reheat coils and cabinet unit heaters), the associated branch control valves shall be closed during Cooling Mode operation to prevent chilled water from entering associated equipment. Locations indicated on floor plans.
6. AHU and ERU Diverting valves: Diverting valve at each AHU and ERU shall operate in same mode as the Dual Temperature loop (i.e. close hot water side and open chilled water during Cooling Mode and close chilled water and open hot water during Heating Mode).
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 8 OF 24
C. Secondary Distribution Pumps (DTP-1 & DTP-2): Pumps shall operate on a run/standby sequence with automatic changeover, according to the following schedule:
1. Pumps shall be enabled at all times. 2. Start lag pump automatically upon failure of lead pump and signal alarm 3. Duty cycle lead/lag pumps based on run time. 4. Variable frequency controller shall vary pump speed to maintain set point at remote differential pressure sensors at end of system.
D. Two-Pipe Dual Temperature Loop Sequence Coordination: Boilers shall not be allowed to start while dual temperature loop is in Cooling Mode, where Chillers and Cooling Tower shall not be allowed to start with dual temperature loop is in Heating Mode.
E. Operator Workstation Display: Display the following data:
1. System graphic. 2. System changeover valve position 3. Heating only changeover valve position (see floor plans for quantity) 4. Dual temperature pump operating status (typical of 2) 5. Dual temperature pump start/stop (typical of 2) 6. Dual temperature pump VFD speed (typical of 2) 7. Dual temperature pump VFD alarm (typical of 2) 8. Differential pressure set point(s). 9. Differential pressure sensor(s). 10. System BTU/H for hot water system (shared) 11. Totalized BTU for hot water system (shared) 12. System BTU/H for chilled water system (shared) 13. Totalized BTU for chilled water system (shared) 14. Dual temperature loop Heating or Cooling mode indication (shared) 15. OA Temperature alarm for Heating Mode 16. OA Temperature alarm for Cooling Mode
1.9 SINGLE ZONE, VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU-1 & AHU-2)
A. System Description:
1. Air handling units (AHU’s) serve the auditorium and gymnasium along with some support spaces. These units are modular central station air handlers with supply fan(s), return fan(s), hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, pre-filter and final filter. CO2 sensors are located in the main return duct, as well as any high density spaces where indicated on plans. Unit shall be controlled to condition a single large zone. 2. System has occupied, unoccupied, warm-up and cool-down modes of operation, adjustable schedule through system.
B. Occupied Mode:
1. During the occupied mode of operation, the unit's supply and return fans shall run to provide conditioned air to the occupied zone. The outside air damper and relief damper shall open and return air damper shall close a corresponding amount. 2. Discharge air temperature shall come under control of BMS. Discharge air temperature shall be set to satisfy cooling zone. 3. Occupied mode shall be set by adjustable BMS time-clock. Default position is 7 am to 12 am. Occupied mode for each system shall be adjustable at Operator Workstation.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 9 OF 24
C. Unoccupied Mode:
1. The unoccupied mode of operation shall commence at the pre-programmed unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the unit's supply and return/relief fans shall de- energize and outside air damper shall close. 2. During the unoccupied mode, if zone falls below the night setback temperature:
a. Where the associated space has perimeter radiation, the radiation control valve shall open to maintain set back temperature as first call of heat. Not applicable for units serving spaces that do not have perimeter radiation. b. If the setback temperature is still not at setpoint, the supply and return/relief fans shall energize with the outside air damper closed.
3. If the outside air temperature is less than 45 deg. F, the heating coil valve shall modulate to maintain a casing temperature of 50 deg. F as sensed by the heating coil discharge air temperature sensor. An alarm shall be sent to the BMS for high and low casing temperature condition. If the outside air temperature is 45 deg. F or above, the heating coil valve shall be closed. 4. Each zone temperature sensor is equipped with a push-button override button. In the event a zone is overridden, the associated unit shall be switched to the occupied mode of operation for a pre-programmed amount of time (2 hours, adj.). 5. Outside air and relief air dampers shall be closed, subject to economizer controls.
D. Warm-Up Mode:
1. Initiate morning warm-up/cool-down cycle 1 hour (adj.) prior to occupancy. 2. The mixing damper is positioned for 100% return air and the cooling coil valve remains closed. The supply and return fans shall start. The supply fan VFD shall control the fan to maintain the supply duct static pressure set point. The return fan shall track the supply fan airflow. 3. The heating coil valve shall modulate to maintain the warm-up discharge air temperature set point of 85 deg. F. (adj.). When times reaches the occupied start time, the unit shall go to the occupied mode and the outdoor air damper shall open to its minimum position. The system is prevented from entering the warm-up mode more than once per day. 4. The sequence shall include optimized morning warm-up, to minimize length of warm-up based on space temperature, outside air temperature and history. Warm-up mode timing shall be adjustable at operator workstation. Optimum start shall start at minimum 1 hour before occupancy; adjust as needed for maximum benefit.
E. Cool-Down Mode:
1. The mixing damper is positioned for 100% return air and the heating coil valve remains closed. The supply and return fans shall start. The supply fan VFD shall control the fan to maintain the supply duct static pressure set point. The return fan shall track the supply fan airflow. 2. When the outdoor air enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing damper is positioned for 100% return air. The cooling coil shall maintain the discharge air temperature set point. When the outdoor air enthalpy is below the economizer changeover value, the mixing damper shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature set point. When the time teaches the occupied start time, the unit shall go to the occupied mode and the outdoor air damper shall open to its minimum position, subject to the enthalpy economizer control. The system is prevented from entering the
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 10 OF 24
Cool-Down mode more than once per day. Morning cool-down shall only be initiated if space temperature is within 3 degrees (adj.) of occupied mode. 3. The sequence shall include optimized cool down to minimize cool down length based on outside air temperature, space temperature and history. Optimum start shall start at minimum 1 hour before occupancy; adjust as needed for maximum benefit.
F. System Operation:
1. System start/stop is manually selectable through the BMS. 2. The outdoor air dampers and relief air dampers shall open to minimum position when the supply fans start. The return air damper shall close a corresponding amount. Whenever the fans stop, the outside air dampers and relief air dampers shall close. Outdoor air dampers and relief air dampers shall remain closed during morning warm-up mode. 3. If a fan failure occurs at a fan, as detected by current switches on each fan, the failed fan is stopped and a critical alarm is generated at the BMS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adj.) after the fan is initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until manually reset through the BMS.
G. Supply Fan and Return Fan Control:
1. Whenever the supply fans are signaled to stop, on a failure of either fan speed control signal, on failure of VFD, or on a failure of fan, the VFD's ramp down to their minimum pre-programmed speed at the programmed ramp rate and stops. 2. VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps to its control points. Unless noted otherwise, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over 60 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 15 Hz, or VFD manufacturer’s rated limit. The VFD's are not allowed to operate if their disconnects are open. On a failure of VFD, as defined by an output from the VFD, a critical alarm is generated at the BMS. The fan with the failed VFD is disabled. 3. Supply airflow control is accomplished by variable frequency drives on the supply and return fans. Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the BMS. 4. Fan speed for the AHU supply fan are controlled from a signal based on system static pressure. Duct static pressure is measured at two (2) pressure transmitters. Fan speed signal shall be identical for units with multiple fans. Locate duct static pressure sensors 2/3 downstream of duct system, unless indicated otherwise. 5. The speed of the supply fan is controlled as follows:
a. The pressure sensors/transmitters signal is low-selected to ensure the worst case system pressure controls the fan speed. b. On a drop in static pressure below set point, as measured by the pressure sensors/transmitters, the speed of the supply fan increases until that static pressure set point has been satisfied. On a rise in static pressure set points of all system pressure sensors/transmitters, the speed of the fan decreases until the set point of any single pressure sensor/transmitter is satisfied. Set points are field adjustable. The actual static pressure set point is the minimum pressure required to achieve design air flow. c. High limit pressure control: the supply air discharge plenum has two static pressure sensor/transmitters. If the average static pressure rises to 1.75" w.c. (adj.), a critical alarm is indicated at the BMS, the fan speed control is overridden, and the VFD is modulated to maintain an average plenum pressure of 1.25" w.c. (adj.) Alarm indication and override control remain in force until manually reset through the BMS. d. Low limit pressure control: the return air inlet plenum has two static pressure sensors/transmitters. If the average static pressure drops to -1.25" w.c. (adj.), a
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 11 OF 24
critical alarm is indicated at the BMS, the fan speed control is overridden, and the VFD is modulated to maintain an average plenum pressure of -0.75" w.c. (adj.). Alarm indication and override control remain in force until manually reset through the BMS. Static-pressure controller located in fan discharge stops fan and signals alarm when static pressure rises above excessive static pressure set point. e. The BMS continuously monitors and compares pressure signals from each pressure sensor/transmitter. Whenever the plenum pressures, as sensed by the pressure sensors/transmitters, have a deviation of more than 20% (adj.), an alarm is indicated at the BMS. Whenever the output from any pressure sensor/transmitter drops below 10% or rises above 90% of calibrated range, that pressure sensor/transmitter signal is locked out of control sequence and an alarm is indicated at the BMS.
6. Return Fan Control: System starts fan to run continuously during occupied periods. System modulates return air variable speed frequency controller to maintain CFM summation between supply fan, relief/return fan and outdoor airflow.
a. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. b. Set variable speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped. c. Whenever fan is stopped, outdoor air dampers shall close. d. Whenever fan is stopped, the associated interlocked supply/return fan(s) shall be off. e. Fan shall not be allowed to operate until outdoor air damper proved open. f. Indicate fan inlet airflow measurement and CFM.
H. Supply Air Temperature Control: When fan is running, system modulates heating and cooling coil valves to maintain discharge supply air temperature of 55 deg. F (adjustable) for cooling and 90 deg. F (adjustable) for heating at sensor located in supply duct main after supply fan.
1. During occupied periods and 15 minutes after unit is enabled, monitor discharge air temperature and alarm if discharge temperature is above or below set point continuously for more than one minute. 2. Reset supply air temperature to satisfy cooling demand.
I. Ventilation Control:
1. Outdoor air shall be continuously measured utilizing airflow stations on the outside air intake. 2. CO2 sensors located in the ducted return at each AHU and within the spaces (as indicated on plans) shall control the outdoor air dampers. The CO2 sensors, through the BMS, shall modulate the outdoor air dampers to maintain a maximum CO2 level of 400 ppm (adj.) above the outdoor air concentration. As the CO2 level rises, the BMS shall modulate the outside air damper open. As the CO2 level decreases, the BMS shall modulate the outside air damper closed. The outside air damper shall not be allowed to close beyond a minimum outdoor airflow set point programmed in the BMS. The mixing dampers shall modulate slowly to minimize overshooting and excessive hunting. 3. The BMS shall be capable of regulating the outdoor airflow to a user defined input value from the operator's workstation. 4. The outside air dampers, return air damper and relief air damper shall each be controlled by separate operators and control points. Mechanical links between dampers is not acceptable. 5. Limit maximum outside air damper position to outside air quantity listed in equipment schedule, except during economizer operation.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 12 OF 24
6. CO2 Demand Control Ventilation: Whenever the system air-handling unit is operating, the system controller shall maintain the base ventilation rate (minimum ventilation rate) unless overridden by a pre-occupancy purge sequence of the DCV function.
a. Whenever the system air-handling unit is operating, the system controller shall maintain the base ventilation rate (minimum ventilation rate) unless overridden by a pre-occupancy purge sequence of the DCV function. b. If CO2 sensor readings are below the system CO2 set point, the AHU shall maintain the base ventilation rate. If any reading is above the set point, the AHU damper controller shall modulate the outside air damper open using a proportional integral derivative (PID) loop to maintain the system CO2. c. Operation shall be dependent upon the equipment mode of operation, so that the DCV function will only operate during occupied periods when the outdoor air damper is actively providing ventilation. DCV control shall be disabled if the CO2 sensor fails.
J. Economizer Control:
1. When the outdoor air enthalpy is below the economizer changeover value, the dampers modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain a mixed air temperature set point 3 deg F below the discharge air temperature set point, subject to the outdoor air ventilation and demand control ventilation (DCV). If the outdoor air dampers are indexed open by the outdoor air ventilation and CO2 control, the heating coil valves and cooling coil valves shall modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the supply air temperature set point. The dampers shall ramp open slowly to minimize overshooting. 2. When the outdoor air enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are placed in the minimum outdoor air position. 3. Cooling coil control valve is locked in closed position whenever outside air temperature is below 50 deg F (adj.) or whenever supply fan is not operating.
K. Hot Water Heating Coil: During occupied periods when fan is running and the plant is in Heating Mode, system modulates control valve to maintain discharge air temperature set point.
1. System resets supply air temperature set point from return air temperature as required to meet cooling space temperature set point. 2. When fan is off, return valve to closed position. 3. Freeze Protection Pump operation (as applicable): When outside air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.), energize freeze protection pump in hot water piping. Freeze protection pump shall run constant volume through hot water coil to maintain casing temperature above 40°F (adj.). Alarm at BMS if freeze protection pump still not energize or at fault condition.
L. Chilled Water Cooling Coil: During occupied periods when fan is running, system modulates control valve to maintain discharge air temperature set point.
1. System resets supply air temperature set point to meet cooling temperature set point. 2. When fan is off, return valve to closed position. 3. Provide overflow sensor in cooling coil drain pain and alarm at operation workstation if approaching an overflow condition. During alarm condition, the supply and return fans shall be disabled.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 13 OF 24
M. Freeze Protection: Low limit duct thermostat, located before supply fan, signals alarm, stops fan(s) closes outside air dampers, and opens heating coil valve when AHU cabinet temperature falls below 40 deg. F. Manual reset to clear alarm and restart unit.
1. Low limit duct thermostat shall be analog device, provided by equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer will not provide, ATC contractor shall provide the low limit thermostat. 2. See Hot Water Heating Coil section above for Freeze Protection Pump controls.
N. Emergency Shutdown Control: Upon signal from the fire alarm control switch, stop fans, close outdoor air dampers and close smoke dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming.
O. Smoke Detection Shutdown: Supply and return duct smoke detectors, when products of combustion are detected in air stream and/or upon signal from fire alarm in the event of alarm within zone, stop supply and return fans, close outdoor air dampers, close smoke dampers and close relief air dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming.
1. Monitor smoke damper open and closed positions through damper end switches. In the event damper closes in a non-alarm condition, stop fans and close outdoor air dampers.
P. Filters: Differential pressure switches will monitor the filters. If the filter pressure drop exceeds its set point, an alarm will be sent to the BMS. Adjust filter pressure drop set point based on flow.
Q. Coordination of Air Handling Sequences: Ensure that mixed-air, heating-coil and cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function. Provide 2 deg F (adj.) deadband between heating and cooling.
R. Dual Temperature Changeover coordination: Coordinate heating and cooling operation of AHU with dual temperature loop seasonal changeover.
1. When loop is in Cooling Mode, AHU shall not have any heat available. BMS shall alarm at any low casing temperature. 2. When loop is in Heating Mode, AHU shall be allowed to enter economizer mode to cool the zone during the changeover period. Chilled water coil operation shall still be locked out due to the chiller being off during Heating Mode. 3. Diverting valve near unit shall operate in conjunction with seasonal changeover valve in main mechanical room.
S. Operator System Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:
1. System graphic. 2. System on-off indication. 3. System occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. Supply fan start/stop 5. Supply fan status 6. Supply fan VFD command 7. Supply fan VFD fault 8. Return fan start/stop 9. Return fan status 10. Return fan VFD command 11. Return fan VFD fault.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 14 OF 24
12. System supply fan airflow rate. 13. System return fan airflow rate. 14. Outside air flow rate. 15. Outside air temperature indication (global). 16. Outside air humidity indication (global). 17. Mixed air temperature indication. 18. Dampers position (all outdoor/return/relief/exhaust air dampers) 19. Dampers open and closed status indication (all outdoor/return/relief/exhaust air dampers). 20. Heating coil air temperature indication. 21. Heating coil air temperature set point. 22. Heating coil control valve position. 23. Chilled water coil air temperature indication. 24. Chilled water coil air temperature set point. 25. Chilled water coil control valve position. 26. Diverting valve position. 27. Freeze protection pump start/stop (as applicable) 28. Freeze protection pump status (as applicable) 29. Freeze protection pump alarm (as applicable) 30. Filter air pressure drop indication. 31. Filter low air pressure set point. 32. Filter high air pressure set point. 33. Return air CO2 sensor setting. 34. Return air CO2 sensor level. 35. Supply air discharge air temperature indication. 36. Supply air discharge air temperature set point. 37. Duct static pressure sensor indication (multiple per unit). 38. Static pressure sensor set point (multiple per unit). 39. Dual temperature loop Heating or Cooling Mode indication (shared).
1.10 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU-1 & ERU-2)
A. System Description:
1. Energy Recovery Units (ERU’s) serve the majority of the building, providing ventilation to the corridors, suites and dormitory common spaces. ERU’s are indoor 100% OA units with energy recovery wheel, supply fan, exhaust fan, chilled water coil, hot water coil and filtration. Unit has variable speed drives for balancing, but will otherwise operable at constant volume. Unit shall work with associated space’s Fan Coil Unit to achieve thermal comfort. 2. System has occupied and unoccupied modes of operation, adjustable schedule through system.
B. Occupied Mode:
1. During the occupied mode of operation, the unit's supply and exhaust fans shall run to provide conditioned air to the occupied zone. The outside air damper and exhaust damper shall open. 2. Discharge air temperature shall come under control of BMS. Discharge air temperature shall be set to satisfy dehumidification requirements for cooling and heating, as required. 3. Occupied mode shall be enabled at all times during occupied hours. Default occupied hours is 24 hour operation, adjustable at Operator Workstation. Unit should be in occupied mode unless the majority of the building is unoccupied due to a school break.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 15 OF 24
C. Unoccupied Mode:
1. The unoccupied mode of operation shall commence at the pre-programmed unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the unit's supply and exhaust fans shall de- energize and outside air damper shall close. 2. During the unoccupied mode, if any of the zones fall below the night setback temperature, the associated space’s fan coil units shall energize to maintain night setback temperature. the supply and exhaust fans shall energize with the outside air damper closed. 3. If Fan Coil Units have been energized and cannot maintain setback temperature, and/or the outside air temperature is less than 45 deg F, the heating coil valve shall modulate to maintain a casing temperature of 50 deg F as sensed by the heating coil discharge air temperature sensor. An alarm shall be sent to the BMS for high and low casing temperature condition. 4. Outside air and relief air dampers shall be closed. 5. If the space setback temperature is not met, with the Fan Coil Units energized and heating coil valve maintain casing temperature, send alarm to BMS to recommend putting unit into Occupied Mode. Unit should only change between Occupied/Unoccupied modes from Operator Workstation or schedule.
D. System Operation:
1. System start/stop is manually selectable through the BMS. 2. ERU is equipped with outside air damper and relief air damper. When the supply and exhaust fans start, the outside and relief air dampers shall open. 3. If a fan failure occurs at a fan, as detected by current switches on each fan, the failed fan is stopped and a critical alarm is generated at the BMS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adj.) after the fan is initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until manually reset through the BMS.
E. Supply and Exhaust Fan Control: Supply and exhaust fans to run continuously during occupied mode.
1. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. 2. Static pressure controller located in fan discharge stops fan and signals alarm when static pressure rises above excessive static pressure set point. Locate duct static pressure sensors 2/3 downstream of duct system, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Whenever fan is stopped, outdoor damper shall close. 4. Whenever fan is running, outdoor damper shall be open. 5. Fan shall not be allowed to operate until outdoor air damper proved open.
F. Supply and Exhaust Fan VFD Control:
1. Whenever the fan is signaled to stop, on a failure of either fan speed control signal, on failure of either VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD’s ramp down to their minimum pre- programmed speed at the programmed ramp rate and stops. 2. Each VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps to their control points. Unless otherwise noted, the VFD’s ramp up and down full scale over 15 seconds. VFD’s do not operate at less than 15 Hz. The VFD’s are not allowed to operate if their disconnects are open. On a failure of either VFD, as defined by an output from the VFD, a critical alarm is generated at the BMS. The fan with the failed VFD is disabled. 3. The VFD shall be used for final balancing purposes and shall be set one time to the speed (Hz) to deliver the design supply air quantity.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 16 OF 24
G. Supply Air Temperature Control:
1. Cooling Mode: When fan is running, system modulates cooling coil valves to maintain discharge supply air temperature of 55 70 deg. F (adjustable) at sensor located in supply duct main after supply fan. Cooling supply air temperature shall be maintained lowered to 55 deg. F (adjustable) where dehumidification is required based on outside air temperature conditions. 2. Heating Mode: When fan is running, system modulates heating coil valves to maintain discharge supply air temperature of 70 85 deg. F (adjustable) at sensor located in supply duct main after supply fan. Increase supply temperature to 85 deg. F (adjustable) if higher supply temperature is required in spaces not served by fan coil units. 3. During occupied periods and 15 minutes after unit is enabled, monitor discharge air temperature and alarm if discharge temperature is above or below set point continuously for more than one minute.
H. Ventilation Control:
1. Outdoor air shall be continuously measured utilizing airflow stations on the outside air intake.
I. Energy Recovery Wheel:
1. Wheel shall energize when supply and return fans are energized, while exhaust temperature is above 33 deg. F. 2. If exhaust temperature drops below 33 deg. F, initialize frost protection. Wheel shall slow until temperature rises. If temperature rises above 5 deg. F, the wheel shall be allowed to increase speed.
J. Economizer Control:
1. When the outdoor air enthalpy is below the economizer changeover value, the dampers modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain a mixed air temperature set point 3 deg F below the discharge air temperature set point, subject to the outdoor air ventilation and demand control ventilation (DCV). If the outdoor air dampers are indexed open by the outdoor air ventilation and CO2 control, the heating coil valves and cooling coil valves shall modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the supply air temperature set point. The dampers shall ramp open slowly to minimize overshooting. 2. When the outdoor air enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are placed in the minimum outdoor air position. 3. Cooling coil control valve is locked in closed position whenever outside air temperature is below 50 deg. F (adj.) or whenever supply fan is not operating.
K. Hot Water Heating Coil: During occupied periods when fan is running, system modulates control valve to maintain discharge air temperature set point.
1. System resets supply air temperature set point from return air temperature as required to meet cooling temperature set point. 2. When fan is off, return valve to closed position. 3. Freeze Protection Pump operation: When outside air temperature drops below 40 deg. F (adj.), energize freeze protection pump in hot water piping. Freeze protection pump shall run constant volume through hot water coil to maintain casing temperature above 40 deg. F (adj.). Alarm at BMS if freeze protection pump still not energize or at fault condition.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 17 OF 24
L. Chilled Water Cooling Coil: During occupied periods when fan is running, system modulates control valve to maintain discharge air temperature set point.
1. System resets supply air temperature to maintain humidity set point at Operator Workstation for dehumidification. 2. When fan is off, return valve to closed position. 3. Provide overflow sensor in cooling coil drain pain and alarm at operation workstation if approaching an overflow condition. During alarm condition, the supply and return fans shall be disabled.
M. Freeze Protection: Low limit duct thermostat temperature sensor, located before supply fan, signals alarm, stops fan(s) closes outside air dampers, and opens heating coil valve when ERU cabinet temperature falls below 40 deg. F. Manual reset to clear alarm and restart unit.
1. Low limit duct thermostat shall be analog device, provided by equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer will not provide, ATC contractor shall provide the low limit thermostat. 2. See Hot Water Heating Coil section above for Freeze Protection Pump controls.
N. Emergency Shutdown Control: Upon signal from the fire alarm control switch, stop fans, close outdoor air dampers and close smoke dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming.
O. Smoke Detection Shutdown: Supply and return duct smoke detectors, when products of combustion are detected in air stream and/or upon signal from fire alarm in the event of alarm within zone, stop supply and return fans, close outdoor air dampers, close smoke dampers and close relief air dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming.
P. Filters: Differential pressure switches will monitor the filters. If the filter pressure drop exceeds its set point, an alarm will be sent to the BMS.
Q. Coordination of Air Handling Sequences: Ensure that mixed-air, heating-coil and cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function. Provide 2 deg. F (adj.) deadband between heating and cooling.
R. Dual Temperature Changeover coordination: Coordinate heating and cooling operation of ERU with dual temperature loop seasonal changeover.
1. When loop is in Cooling Mode, ERU shall not have any heat available. BMS shall alarm at any low casing temperature. 2. When loop is in Heating Mode, ERU shall be allowed to enter economizer mode during the changeover period. Chilled water coil operation shall still be locked out due to the chiller being off during Heating Mode. 3. Diverting valve near unit shall operate in conjunction with seasonal changeover valve in main mechanical room.
S. Hall Director Apartment Ventilation: ERU serving the Hall Director Apartment shall be provided with motorized damper in associated ventilation duct; see floor plans for location. When ERU is put in unoccupied mode when the students are not present, close motorized damper.
T. Operator Workstation Display:
1. System graphic.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 18 OF 24
2. System on-off indication. 3. System occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. Supply fan start/stop 5. Supply fan status 6. Supply fan VFD command 7. Supply fan VFD fault 8. Exhaust fan start/stop 9. Exhaust fan status 10. Exhaust fan VFD command 11. Exhaust fan VFD fault 12. System supply fan airflow rate 13. System exhaust fan airflow rate. 14. Outside air flow rate. 15. Outside air temperature indication (global). 16. Outside air humidity indication (global). 17. Dampers position (all outdoor/return/relief/exhaust air dampers) 18. Dampers open and closed status indication (all outdoor/return/relief/exhaust air dampers). 19. Heating coil air temperature indication. 20. Heating coil air temperature set point. 21. Heating coil control valve position. 22. Chilled water coil air temperature indication. 23. Chilled water coil air temperature set point. 24. Chilled water coil control valve position. 25. Diverting valve position. 26. Freeze protection pump start/stop. 27. Freeze protection pump status. 28. Freeze protection pump alarm. 29. Filter air pressure drop indication. 30. Filter low air pressure set point. 31. Filter high air pressure set point. 32. Supply air discharge air temperature indication. 33. Supply air discharge air temperature set point. 34. Supply air discharge air humidity indication. 35. Duct static pressure sensor indication (multiple per unit). 36. Static pressure sensor set point (multiple per unit). 37. Dual temperature loop Heating or Cooling Mode indication (shared).
1.11 EXHAUST FANS
A. Chiller Room Exhaust Fan (EF-1)
1. Exhaust fan serving the chiller room shall be controlled on the schedule indicated below. When the fan is commanded to start, the respective exhaust damper shall energize open. Once the damper is proven open via end switch, the exhaust fan shall be allowed to start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. 2. Fan Operating Schedule:
a. During normal conditions, fan shall be off. b. The exhaust fan will be controlled by the refrigerant detector in the Chiller mechanical room.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 19 OF 24
1) When refrigerant detector has not been actuated, exhaust fan remain off, as “Normal Mode”. Motorized dampers on the mechanical room fan exhaust duct and FCU-B-8 supply duct shall remain open. The motorized damper on the make-up air duct and for the chiller room exhaust fan shall remain closed. 2) On actuation of the refrigerant detector, the exhaust fan shall run in “Emergency Mode”. BMS shall command the make-up air and exhaust fan damper to fully open position, and close the dampers on the FCU supply duct and mechanical room fan exhaust duct. Exhaust fan energize and run to maintain fan static pressure and Emergency Mode CFM. Exhaust fan shall be commanded to start if it is off during actuation of the refrigerant detector.
3. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Exhaust fan command. c. Exhaust fan status. d. Exhaust fan alarm. e. Damper end switch status. f. Chiller room ductwork motorized damper position (typical of 3).
B. Mechanical Room Exhaust Fan (EF-2)
1. Exhaust fan serving the mechanical room shall be controlled on the schedule indicated below. When the fan is commanded to start, the respective exhaust damper shall energize open. Once the damper is proven open via end switch, the exhaust fan shall be allowed to start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. 2. Fan Operating Schedule: Fan shall be energized at design airflow at all times unless the following conditions apply:
a. When FCU-B-8 is off and its motorized damper closed, mechanical room exhaust fan shall de-energize. b. When the chiller room exhaust fan is energized, BMS shall adjust speed on mechanical room fan EC motor to reduce speed.
3. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Exhaust fan command. c. Exhaust fan status. d. Exhaust fan alarm. e. Damper end switch status. f. EC motor speed. g. Chiller room exhaust motorized damper position. h. FCU-B-8 on/off status (shared)
C. Bathroom Exhaust Fan (EF-3)
1. Exhaust fan serving the apartment bathroom and kitchen shall be controlled on a local switch within the space. When the fan is commanded to start, the respective exhaust
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 20 OF 24
damper shall energize open. Once the damper is proven open via end switch, the exhaust fan shall be allowed to start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. 2. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Exhaust fan command. c. Exhaust fan status. d. Exhaust fan alarm. e. Damper end switch status. f. ERU-2 on/off status (shared) g. ERU supply duct motorized damper position.
D. Dryer Booster Exhaust Fan (EF-4)
1. Exhaust fan serving the dryers shall be controlled on the schedule indicated below. When the fan is commanded to start, the respective exhaust damper shall energize open. Once the damper is proven open via end switch, the exhaust fan shall be allowed to start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. 2. Fan Operating Schedule:
a. Packaged dryer booster fan controls shall tie fan operation with dryer use. b. Fan shall be energized as long as long as (1) dryer is on. c. Fan shall run to discharge dryer exhaust air to roof. Variable frequency controller shall ramp up and down as required, based on how many dryers are active and running at once.
3. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Exhaust fan command. c. Exhaust fan status. d. Exhaust fan alarm. e. Damper end switch status. f. Dryer on/off (typical of 4) g. Lint filter alarm.
E. Kitchen Exhaust Fan (KEF-1) and Makeup Fan (SF-1):
1. System Description:
a. Kitchen exhaust fan shall be interlocked with associated exhaust hood, as provided by kitchen equipment contractor. Makeup fan shall coordinate operation with kitchen exhaust fan.
2. Kitchen Exhaust Fan Control:
a. Once corresponding hood is activated on, fan shall energize and start.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 21 OF 24
b. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. c. Food Service Contractor shall provide a packaged system, which shall provide heat and smoke detection sensors within each hood. d. As the temperature and/or obscurity sensors detect heat or smoke, or from switch on the hood, the fan shall energize to design exhaust flow rate. e. Once the fan is energized, the motorized damper in the ERU exhaust duct shall close.
3. Makeup Fan Control:
a. Once kitchen exhaust fan is energized on, makeup fan shall energize and start. b. An amperage switch installed on the fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amperage switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to the BMS. c. Once the fan is energized, the motorized damper in the ERU exhaust duct shall close and the motorized damper at the roof shall open. d. Once the kitchen exhaust fan is energized off, the makeup fan shall energize off and the motorized damper for the fan will close.
4. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Exhaust Fan command (typical of 2). c. Exhaust Fan status (typical of 2). d. Exhaust Fan alarm (typical of 2). e. Damper end switch status (typical of 2). f. ERU exhaust duct motorized damper position. g. Fire Suppression system on/off status.
1.12 TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCES
A. Fan Coil Units:
1. System Description: Fan coil units to heat and cool associated spaces using room thermostat temperature sensor. Fan shall cycle and control valves on hot water and chilled water piping shall open/close as needed based on load. Provide dead band between heating and cooling set points. 2. Associated fan(s) shall run at medium speed or lower. 3. Provide overflow sensor in cooling coil drain pain and alarm at operation workstation if approaching an overflow condition. During alarm condition, the FCU supply fan(s) shall be disabled. 4. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Room/area served. c. Room temperature. d. Room temperature set point. e. Discharge air temperature. f. Control-valve position as percent open (chilled water and hot water)
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 22 OF 24
B. Hot Water Reheat Coils:
1. Hot water reheat coils are mounted within the duct of the associated ERU. 2. Room thermostat temperature sensor opens control valve. Pipe-mounted temperature sensor thermostat stops fan when returning heating water temperature falls below set point. Modulate control valve closed as heating set point is reached. 3. Dual Temperature Loop Coordination: Once Heating Mode is active, open control valves at branch piping for connection to Dual Temperature Loop. Once Cooling Mode is active, close control valves at branch piping to disconnect unit from Dual Temperature Loop and prevent chilled water from entering unit. See Dual Temperature controls earlier in this section. 4. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Room/area served. c. Room temperature. d. Room temperature set point. e. Hot water control-valve position as percent open. f. ERU on/off status (shared)
C. Cabinet Unit Heaters:
1. Room thermostat cycles fan and opens control valve. Pipe-mounted thermostat stops fan when returning heating water temperature falls below set point. 2. Dual Temperature Loop Coordination: Once Heating Mode is active, open control valves at branch piping for connection to Dual Temperature Loop. Once Cooling Mode is active, close control valves at branch piping to disconnect unit from Dual Temperature Loop and prevent chilled water from entering unit. See Dual Temperature controls earlier in this section. 3. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Room/area served. c. Room temperature. d. Room temperature set point. e. Hot water control-valve position as percent open.
D. Unit Heaters:
1. Unit-mounted thermostat cycles fan when return heating water, space temperature falls below set point. Subject to aquastat, verifying hot water flow. (Note: Stand-alone control. Do not tie into BMS.)
E. Split System Air Conditioning Units
1. Packaged control system operates split evaporator and condensing units to maintain space temperature. Packaged controls shall coordinate operation where a condensing unit controls multiple evaporator units. 2. BMS shall monitor alarm contacts on unit’s factory controller and send an alarm to the operator workstation if any faults occur. 3. BMS shall monitor space temperature and humidity and alarm on high or low conditions. High temperature set point is 85 deg. F (adjustable).
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 23 OF 24
4. BMS to provide overflow sensor in cooling coil drain pan and alarm at operation workstation if approaching an overflow condition. During alarm condition the ACU supply fan shall be disabled. 5. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Space Temperature c. Space Relative Humidity d. ACU Fault e. High Condensate Level Alarm
F. Steam Condensate Return Duplex Pump
1. Use sequence for both new and existing steam condensate return pump. 2. Packaged controls in pump shall monitor water level and run pump as needed. 3. Mechanical alternator shall switch sequence duplex pumps in unit. 4. Operator Workstation Display:
a. System graphic. b. Pump on/off. c. Pump status. d. Pump alarm. e. Condensate return pressure. f. Condensate return temperature. g. High water level alarm.
1.13 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION
A. Carbon monoxide (CO) sensors shall be ceiling mounted within space as shown on plans. CO sensors shall be tied into BMS.
B. When sensors detect CO within the associated space, send signal through BMS to Fire Alarm system.
1. If applicable, connect CO sensor to associated room pilot light. Light shall turn on when CO sensor is set to alarm condition. Otherwise, pilot light shall remain off.
C. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Sensor on/off. 2. CO measurement. 3. Alarm condition.
1.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS (HWRP-1)
A. Domestic hot water recirculating pump shall be under time clock control of the BMS system for stop/start.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PAGE 24 OF 24
B. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Pump S/S 2. Pump Status
1.15 EXISTING DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS (BURR HALL)
A. Existing domestic hot water recirculating pump serving Burr Hall shall be under time clock control of the BMS system for stop/start.
B. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Pump S/S 2. Pump Status
1.16 PLUMBING EJECTOR PUMPS (EP-1)
A. The BMS shall monitor a common alarm dry contact in the pump control panel.
B. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Unit identification 2. High water alarm
1.17 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
A. Interior/Exterior Lighting Control panels shall be under time clock control of the BMS system for stop/start. B. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Exterior Lighting Control Panel S/S 2. Interior Lighting Control Panel S/S
1.18 MISCELLANEOUS MONITORING POINTS
A. BMS shall monitor smoke damper status.
B. Monitor university electrical meters for consumption and demand.
C. Operator Workstation Display:
1. Smoke dampers (each) 2. University electrical meters (each)
END OF SECTION 23 09 93 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 1 OF 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
B. DDC: Direct digital control.
C. EER: Energy efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.
D. IPLV: Integrated Part-Load Value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and referenced to AHRI standard rating conditions.
E. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.
F. NPLV: Nonstandard Part-Load Value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the AHRI standard rating conditions.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Performance at AHRI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 2. Performance at AHRI standard unloading conditions. 3. Minimum evaporator and condenser flow rate. 4. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 5. Oil capacity of water chiller. 6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 7. Fluid capacity of condenser. 8. Characteristics of safety relief valves.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 2 OF 19
9. Minimum entering condenser-water temperature. 10. Performance at varying capacity with constant design condenser-water temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacity for different condenser-water temperatures from design to minimum in 5 deg. F increments. 11. Force and moment capacity of each piping connection. 12. Minimum flow rate for evaporator and condenser at design conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. Drawings, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
a. Structural supports. b. Piping roughing-in requirements. c. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment. d. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
2. Coordination drawings showing plan, section, and elevation views, drawn to 1/4” = 1’-0” scale. 3. Each view to show screened background with the following:
a. Column grids, beams, columns, and concrete housekeeping pads. b. Room layout with walls, floors, and roofs, including each room name and number. c. Equipment and products of other trades that are located in vicinity of chillers and part of final installation, such as lighting, fire suppression systems, and plumbing systems.
B. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for water chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 3 OF 19
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Startup service reports.
F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Instructional Videos: Including those that are prerecorded and those that are recorded during training.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Tool kit specially designed by chiller manufacturer for use in servicing chiller(s) to include the following:
1. Special tools required to service chiller components not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routine maintenance. 2. Lockable case with hinged cover, marked with large and permanent text to indicate the special purpose of tool kit, such as "Chiller Tool Kit." Text size shall be at least 1 inch high. 3. List of each tool furnished. Permanently attach the list to underside of case cover. Text size shall be at least 0.5 inch high.
B. Touch-up Paint: 32 oz.container of paint used for finish coat. Label outside of container with detailed description of paint to allow for procurement of a matching paint in the future.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. AHRI Certification: Certify chiller according to AHRI 590 certification program.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
B. Package water chiller for export shipping.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge. b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 4 OF 19
c. Refrigerant and oil charge.
1) Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason due to manufacturer product defect and product installation.
d. Parts and labor.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Trane. 3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:
1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 55 deg. F and providing stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature. 2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 65 deg. F. 3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with performance indicated.
B. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for site altitude.
C. AHRI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
D. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 5 OF 19
G. Comply with requirements of UL 1995 "Heating and Cooling Equipment," and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.
H. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
I. Operation Following Loss of Normal Power:
1. Equipment, associated factory- and field-installed controls, and associated electrical equipment and power supply connected to backup power system shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to the operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power without need for manual intervention by an operator when power is restored, either through a backup power source or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought on- line. 2. See Drawings for equipment served by backup power systems. 3. Provide means and methods required to satisfy requirement even if not explicitly indicated.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser where indicated, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories.
2.4 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLIES
A. Compressors:
1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with hermetically sealed casing.
a. Construct chiller using semi-hermetic helical rotary screw compressors with independent circuits b. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts. c. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of variable frequency drive. Compressor must start unloaded for soft start on motors. d. Provide crankcase heater and/or oil sump heater to evaporate refrigerant. Energize heater when compressor is not operating.
2. Each compressor shall have suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil heater, and suction strainer.
a. For multiple compressor assemblies, it is acceptable to isolate each compressor assembly in lieu of each compressor.
3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 4. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling, plus hot-gas bypass.
a. Digital compressor unloading is an acceptable alternative to achieve capacity control.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 6 OF 19
b. Chiller should be able to unload to 25 percent of full load tonnage with constant entering condenser water temperature.
5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection, filter with magnetic plug or removable magnet in sump, and initial oil charge.
a. Manufacturer's other standard methods of providing positive lubrication are acceptable in lieu of an automatic pump. b. Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping and normal operation.
6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.
a. For multiple compressor assemblies, it is acceptable to isolate each compressor assembly in lieu of each compressor.
7. Sound-reduction package shall consist of acoustic enclosures around the compressors that are designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.
B. Compressor Motors:
1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each phase. 3. The motor shall be semi-hermetic and either suction gas or liquid refrigerant cooled. Hot gas motor cooling is not acceptable. Open drives are not acceptable in positive pressure refrigerant systems (HFC-134a) due to the possibility of oil and refrigerant leaks at the shaft seal between the open motor and the compressor.
C. Compressor Motor Controllers:
1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing.
2.5 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A. Refrigerant Type: R-134A. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.
B. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.
C. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include an electronic or a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.
D. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line and the refrigerant liquid line to allow the isolation and storage of the refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 7 OF 19
1. For multiple compressor assemblies, it is acceptable to isolate each compressor assembly in each circuit in lieu of each compressor. 2. Isolation valves must be selected in order to be able to isolate the charge in the condenser.
a. Units operating with refrigerant having positive pressure at 75°F (HFC-134a) shall have the capability of storing the entire refrigerant charge in the condenser or shall have a pump-out system for each machine complete with a separate transfer pump, condensing unit and tank constructed in accordance with ASME Code for unfired pressure vessels bearing the National Board stamp. Pump-out systems shall be supplied and warranted by the centrifugal machine manufacturer. Pump-outs shall comply with the following:
1) Pump-out tank(s) with ASME stamp capable of holding refrigerant charge when 80 percent full at 90 deg. F. 2) Separate charging connections for liquid and gas refrigerant. 3) Piping and valves between pump-out and chiller to be supplied and installed by installing contractor. Contractor shall provide all piping, electrical equipment, and wiring required. Refrigerant piping shall be Type K hard-drawn copper with wrought copper fittings. Valves shall be pack-less type suitable for refrigerant use.
E. Pressure Relief Device:
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15, ASHRAE 147, and applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Select and configure pressure relief devices to protect against corrosion and inadvertent release of refrigerant. 3. Device shall be ASME-rated, spring-loaded, pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type. Each heat exchanger shall be equipped with pressure relief valve(s).
F. Basis-of-design equipment uses 1 refrigerant circuit with a single compressor. If manifolded compressors are provided, then individual compressor warranties must be provided for each compressor motor.
G. An electronically controlled expansion valve (EXV) is provided to maintain proper refrigerant flow.
H. Chiller shall be able to unload to 25% of capacity with AHRI relief and constant entering condenser water temperature.
I. Provide for each refrigerant circuit
1. Suction service valve 2. Discharge service valve 3. Liquid line shutoff valve 4. Filter
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 8 OF 19
2.6 EVAPORATOR
A. Shell and Tube:
1. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through the shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell. 2. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. Shell Material: Carbon steel. 4. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to ensure positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle. 5. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping. Furnish flange adapters to mate to flanged piping. 6. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.
a. Evaporator tubes shall be internally and externally enhanced. The tubes shall be securely supported at intermediate supports and physically expanded into both ends of the tube sheets. The evaporator tubes must also be removable from both ends to provide easy access for tube cleaning. The minimum evaporator tube wall thickness, root-to-root across the entire tube length shall be 0.025". It is unacceptable to provide this thickness at the intermediate supports only.
7. Provide evaporator waterbox designed for 150 psig maximum waterside working pressure, with grooved pipe water connections. Waterside shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times design working pressure.
2.7 CONDENSER
A. Shell and Tube:
1. Description: Shell-and-tube design with refrigerant flowing through the shell and fluid flowing through the tubes within the shell. 2. Positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. 3. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 4. Shell Material: Carbon steel. 5. Water Boxes: Removable, of carbon-steel construction, located at each end of the tube bundle with fluid nozzles terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping. Furnish flange adapters to mate to flanged piping.
a. Provide non-marine condenser waterbox designed for 150 psig maximum waterside working pressure, with grooved pipe water connections. Waterside shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times design working pressure.
6. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 9 OF 19
a. Condenser tubes shall be internally and externally enhanced. The tubes shall be securely supported at intermediate supports and physically expanded into both ends. The condenser tubes must also be removable from both ends to provide easy access for tube removal or tube cleaning. The minimum condenser tube wall thickness, root-to-root across the entire tube length shall be 0.025. It is unacceptable to provide this thickness at the intermediate supports only.
7. Each condenser shall have a pressure relief device, purge cock, and liquid-line shutoff valve.
2.8 INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type 1 for tubular materials and Type 2 for sheet materials.
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.
1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. 2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces. 3. Seal seams and joints for a vapor barrier. 4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts. 5. Manufacturer has option to factory- or field-insulate chiller components of chillers to reduce potential for damage during installation. 6. Field-Applied Insulation:
a. Components that are not factory insulated shall be field insulated to comply with requirements indicated. b. Manufacturer shall be responsible for chiller insulation whether factory or field installed to ensure manufacturer is the single point of responsibility for chillers. c. Manufacturer factory-authorized service representative shall instruct and supervise installation of field-applied insulation. d. After field-applied insulation is complete, paint insulation to match factory- applied finish.
7. If waterbox insulation is not factory installed, the additional cost for material and labor associated with field installation must be included in total chiller price.
2.9 ELECTRICAL
A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 10 OF 19
B. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water chiller.
C. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key.
D. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
E. Install factory wiring located outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. Make terminal connections with not more than a 24-inch length of liquidtight or flexible metallic] conduit.
F. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker. Minimum short circuit current rating (SCCR) according to UL 508 shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000 A.
G. Each motor shall have branch power circuit and controls with one of the following disconnecting means having SCCR to match main disconnecting means:
1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses for Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1. 2. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short- circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
H. Each motor shall have overcurrent protection.
I. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller control microprocessor.
J. Phase Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings.
K. Controls Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.
L. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays, or an integral component to water chiller microprocessor.
M. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:
1. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases. 2. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. 3. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). 4. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). 5. Power factor. 6. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). 7. Fault log, with time and date of each.
2.10 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD), UNIT MOUNTED
A. The water chiller shall be furnished with an air cooled variable speed drive (VSD) as shown on the drawings.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 11 OF 19
B. The VSD will be specifically designed to interface with the water chiller controls and allow for the operating ranges and specific characteristics of the chiller.
C. The VSD efficiency shall be 97% or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental displacement power factor shall be a minimum of 0.96 at all loads.
D. The VSD shall be solid state, microprocessor based pulse-width modulated (PWM) design. The VSD shall be voltage and current regulated. Output power devices shall be IGBTs.
E. Power semi-conductor and capacitor cooling shall be from a liquid or air cooled heatsink.
F. The VSDs shall each be furnished in a metal enclosure having as minimum a short circuit withstand rating of 65,000 amps per UL 508. It will include three phase input lugs plus a grounding lug for electrical connections, output motor connection via factory installed bus bars and all components properly segregated and completely enclosed in a single metal enclosure.
1. Enclosure shall include a padlockable, door-mounted circuit breaker with a minimum AIC rating of 65,000 amps. 2. The entire chiller package shall be UL/CUL listed.
G. The VSD shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508 and shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as designated by OSHA.
H. Compliance to recommendations for harmonic mitigation.
1. The VSD design shall include a DC link reactor on positive and negative rails to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VSD from power line transients.
I. Input shall be nominal 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz AC power, +/- 10 percent of nominal voltage.
J. Line frequency 49-61 hertz.
K. The VSD shall include the following features:
1. All control circuit voltages are physically and electrically isolated from power circuit voltage. 2. 150% instantaneous torque available for improved surge control. 3. Soft start, adjustable linear acceleration, controlled ramp-down to stop. 4. Insensitivity to incoming power phase sequence. 5. Adjustable current limiting and U.L. approved electronic motor overload protection. 6. Output line-to-line short circuit protection. 7. Line-to-ground short circuit protection. 8. Protection from phase loss at AFD input. 9. Protection from output phase reversal/imbalance. 10. Protection from over/under-voltage. 11. Protection from over-temperature.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 12 OF 19
L. The following VSD status indicators shall be available to the unit controller to facilitate startup and maintenance:
1. DC Bus voltage. 2. Output/load amps. 3. Fault.
M. Service Conditions:
1. Operating ambient temperature of 14 deg. F – 104 deg. F (-10 deg. C – 40 deg. C). 2. Room ambient up to 95% relative humidity. 3. Elevation to 3300 feet (1000 meters). For every 300 feet (90 meters) above 3300 feet, the rated output current shall be decreased by 0.4% up to 9900 feet.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.
B. Standalone, microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power.
C. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or include a separate enclosure of matching construction.
D. Digital Communications to BAS system shall consist of a BACnet open standard communication protocol. BACnet shall be capable of communicating MS/TP using RS- 485 hardware.
E. The chiller control panel shall utilize the following components to automatically take action to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions which will perform as follows:
1. High pressure limit that is set 10% lower than factory pressure switch that will automatically unload the compressor to help prevent a high pressure condenser control trip. One switch is required for each compressor and indicating light shall also be provided. 2. Current limit setpoint that is set to 120% of compressor RLA that will automatically unload the compressor to help prevent an overcurrent trip. One protector is required for each compressor and indicating light shall also be provided. 3. Low refrigerant temperature limit that will automatically unload the compressor to help prevent a low evaporator temperature trip. 4. In all of the above cases, the chiller will continue to run, in an unloaded state, and will continue to produce some chilled water in an attempt to meet the cooling load. However, if the chiller reaches the trip-out limits, the chiller controls will take the chiller off line for protection, and a manual reset is required. Once the "near trip" condition is corrected, the chiller will return to normal operation and can then produce full load cooling. 5. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller sensors, actuators, relays, and switches. The panel shall be a complete system for stand-alone chiller control and include controls to safely and efficiently operate the chiller.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 13 OF 19
F. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character, backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following:
1. Date and time. 2. Operating or alarm status. 3. Operating hours. 4. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. 5. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. 6. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. 7. Entering and leaving temperatures of condenser water. 8. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. 9. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. 10. No cooling load condition. 11. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). 12. Pump status. 13. Antirecycling timer status. 14. Percentage of maximum motor amperage. 15. Current-limit set point. 16. Number of compressor starts. 17. Alarm history with retention of operational data before unit shutdown. 18. Chilled water setpoint 19. Electrical 3 phase current limit and percent RLA setpoint 20. Electrical 3 phase amp draw 21. Chiller operating mode 22. Elapsed time and number-of-starts counter 23. Chiller compressor run status relay 24. The control panel display shall identify the fault, indicate date, time, and operating mode at time of occurrence, and provide type of reset required and a help message. The historic diagnostic report shall display the last 20 diagnostics with their times and dates of occurrence
G. Control Functions: Coordinate control functions with those specified in Section 230993 “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls”.
1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. 2. Capacity control based on evaporator leaving-fluid temperature. 3. Capacity control compensated by rate of change of evaporator entering-fluid temperature. 4. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limit. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on return-water temperature. 5. Current limit and demand limit. 6. Condenser-water temperature. 7. External water chiller emergency stop. 8. Antirecycling timer. 9. Automatic lead-lag switching. 10. Ice-building mode.
H. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset:
1. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 14 OF 19
2. Low chilled-water temperature. 3. Refrigerant high pressure. 4. High or low oil pressure. 5. High oil temperature. 6. Loss of chilled-water flow. 7. Loss of condenser-water flow. 8. Control device failure.
I. DDC System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable system to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.
1. Hardwired I/O Points:
a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm, electrical power demand (kilowatts) and electrical power consumption (kilowatt hours). b. Control: On/off operation, chilled-water discharge temperature set-point adjustment and electrical power demand limit
2. Communication Interface: ASHRAE 135 (BACnet communication interface shall enable control system operator to remotely control and monitor the water chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at water chiller control panel shall be available through DDC system for HVAC.
J. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in an NFPA 70 complaint raceway. Make terminal connections with liquidtight or flexible metallic conduit.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Factory-furnished, chilled- and condenser-water paddle or pressures differential type flow switches for field installation.
1. Manufacturer has option to factory install switches.
B. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each refrigeration circuit.
1. Pressure measurement and display through chiller integral controls is an acceptable alternative.
C. Factory-furnished neoprene or spring isolators for field installation.
D. Adjustable or float type refrigerant metering devices and thermal expansion valves (TXV) shall be inspected and adjusted by the manufacturer annually for the first five years of operation to assure equivalent reliability to an electronic expansion valve (EXV) system. A written report shall be forwarded to the owner each year over the first five years to confirm completion of calibration.
E. Units with multi-stage compressors shall incorporate an interstage flash vessel economizer in the refrigerant cycle.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 15 OF 19
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.
B. Factory performance test water chillers, before shipping, according to AHRI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
1. Test the following conditions:
a. Design conditions indicated. b. AHRI 550/590 part-load points.
2. Allow Owner access to place where water chillers are being tested. Notify Owner 14 days in advance of testing.
C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and water-cooled condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.
D. For water chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 575 procedure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, controls, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping, controls, and electrical connections.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases with actual equipment to be installed. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into concrete bases.
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures with actual equipment to be installed.
C. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.
D. Equipment Mounting:
1. Install water chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03 specifications.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 16 OF 19
2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Maintain clearances required by governing code.
G. Chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel shall charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.
H. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
1. Chillers shipped in multiple major assemblies shall be field assembled by chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel.
I. Provide elastomeric isolation pads to reduce vibration transmission.
J. On units without unit mounted starters provide for connection of electrical wiring between starter and chiller control panel, oil pump, and purge unit.
K. Furnish and install necessary auxiliary water piping for oil cooling units and purge condensers.
L. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to chillers, allow space for service and maintenance.
D. Evaporator Fluid Connections:
1. Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. 2. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. 3. Make connections to water chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.
E. Condenser Fluid Connections:
1. Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 17 OF 19
2. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. 3. Make connections to water chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.
F. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: For water chillers installed indoors, extend vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect to pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve. Size as recommended by manufacturer.
G. Connect each drain connection with a drain valve, full size of drain connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.
H. Connect each chiller vent connection with an automatic or a manual vent, full size of vent connection.
3.4 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Install nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 0.5 inch high. Locate nameplate where easily visible.
3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.
B. Connect control wiring between chillers and other equipment to interlock operation as required for a complete and functioning system.
C. Connect control wiring between chiller control interface and DDC System for remote monitoring and control of chillers. Comply with requirements in Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” and Section 230993 “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls”.
D. Install nameplate on face of chiller control panel indicating control equipment designation serving chiller and the I/O point designation for each control connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 0.5 inch high.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 18 OF 19
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run-in period. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented outside. 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup and shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low- temperature interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Inspect field-assembled components; equipment installation; and piping, controls, and electrical connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.
E. Visually inspect chiller for damage before starting. Repair or replace damaged components, including insulation. Do not start chiller until damage that is detrimental to operation has been corrected.
F. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.
1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified. 2. Provide not less than eight hours of training. 3. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant operation. 4. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete. 6. Owner training shall be held at Project site.
3.8 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. OEM startup is performed by factory trained and authorized servicing technicians confirming equipment has been correctly installed and passes specification checklist prior to equipment becoming operational and covered under OEM warranty. Compliance is required to preserve the factory warranty.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 64 23.16 WATER-COOLED, SCROLL WATER CHILLERS PAGE 19 OF 19
1. Included OEM Factory Startup:
a. Centrifugal, Rotary Screw, Scroll Chillers
END OF SECTION 23 64 23.16 03/27/2018 – ADDENDUM 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 1 OF 9
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heat wheels. 2. Packaged energy recovery units.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
C. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 2 OF 9
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units. 3. Wheel Belts: One set of belts for each heat wheel.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ARI Compliance:
1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment."
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 3 OF 9
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." 2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to recommendations of NRCA.
E. UL Compliance:
1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators." 2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT WHEELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Advanced Thermal Technologies. 2. Airxchange Inc. 3. American Energy Exchange, Inc. 4. AIROTOR LLC. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. SEMCO Incorporated.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 4 OF 9
7. Trane. 8. Xetex.
B. Casing:
1. Steel with standard factory-painted finish. 2. Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent at 1.6- inch wg and 0.20 percent at 4-inch wg differential pressure. 3. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section. 4. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings having extended grease fittings or permanently lubricated bearings. Support horizontal rotors on tapered roller bearing.
C. Rotor: Aluminum segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic, noncorrosive, silica-gel desiccant coating.
1. Maximum Solid Size for Media to Pass: 800 micrometer.
D. Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed by variable frequency controller and self-adjusting multilink belt around outside of rotor.
1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
E. Controls:
1. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring. 2. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, permitting input of field connected 4-20 mA or 1-10-V control signal. 3. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust-air sensor to vary rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing. 4. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust- and outdoor-air sensors, automatic changeover thermostat and set-point adjuster, to vary rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing and air differential temperature above set point. Rotor speed shall increase to maximum when exhaust-air temperature is less than outdoor-air temperature. 5. Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed. 6. Speed Settings: Adjustable settings for maximum and minimum rotor speed limits.
F. Control: Integral plenum containing heat-pipe coil and gasketed, face-and-bypass, opposed- blade dampers with rods extended outside casing for damper operator and linkage.
G. Control: Pivot center of bottom of heat-pipe coil on shaft and bearings to tilt coil. Include tilt controls with electronic controller, electric actuator and linkage, thermostats, sensors, and polyester fabric with PVC-coated flexible connector for automatic supply temperature regulation, summer/winter changeover, and frost protection.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 5 OF 9
2.2 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Advanced Thermal Technologies. 2. American Energy Exchange, Inc. 3. Applied Air. 4. Carnes Company. 5. Des Champs Technologies. 6. Engineered Air. 7. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 8. Loren Cook Company. 9. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc. 10. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada Inc. 11. RenewAire LLC. 12. Trane. 13. Venmar CES Inc. 14. Xetex.
B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 2-inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.
1. Inlet: Weatherproof hood, with damper for exhaust and supply.
a. Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper. b. Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.
2. Unit shall mount on structural dunnage.
D. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.
E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with restrained, spring isolators and insulated flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Drive type indicated on Drawing. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 4. Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch static deflection.
F. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum. 3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 6 OF 9
4. Thickness: 2 inches. 5. Minimum Arrestance: 90, according to ASHRAE 52.1. 6. MERV: 13, according to ASHRAE 52.2. 7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats with antimicrobial agent and held by self-supporting wire grid. 8. Media-Grid Frame: Galvanized steel. 9. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
G. Cooling Coils: Rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33, and bearing the ARI label.
1. Access: Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil and to allow in- place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 2. Casing: Manufacturer's standard material 3. Tubes: Copper, 0.035 inch wall thickness. 4. Tube Headers: Manufacturer's standard material 5. Fins: Aluminum. 6. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond. 7. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air under water. 8. Refrigerant Coils:
a. Capacity Reduction: Circuit coils for face control. b. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
9. Coating: Phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating after assembly.
H. Cooling-Coil Condensate Drain Pans:
1. Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet and sloped in multiple planes to collect and drain condensate from cooling coils, coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends. 2. Complying with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 3. Drain Connections: At low point of pan with minimum 1” threaded nipple. 4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect and drain condensate from top coil.
I. Hot-Water Coils: Rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33, and bearing the ARI label.
1. Access: Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil and to allow in- place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 2. Casing: Manufacturer's standard material. 3. Tubes: Copper. 4. Tube Headers: Manufacturer's standard material 5. Fins: Aluminum. 6. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond. 7. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air under water.
J. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip. 2. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 7 OF 9
3. Include fused disconnect switches. 4. Variable-speed controller to vary fan capacity from 100 to approximately 50 percent.
K. Accessories:
1. Units shall mount on dunnage 2. Intake weather hood with 2-inch- thick filters. 3. Louvered intake weather hood with 2-inch- thick filters in V-bank configuration. 4. Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen. 5. Low-Leakage, Isolation Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade, extruded-aluminum dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in opposed-blade arrangement with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in [stainless-steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single extruded-aluminum frame, with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg. 6. Isolation Dampers: Opposed-blade, extruded-aluminum dampers with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single extruded-aluminum frame with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Blades shall have gaskets and edge seals, and shall be mechanically fastened to operating rod. 7. Duct flanges. 8. Rubber-in-shear isolators for ceiling-mounted units. 9. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches. 10. Drain pans for condensate removal complying with ASHRAE 62.1. 11. Automatic, in-place, spray-wash system. 12. Weatherproofing for tilt-control system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is away from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals. 2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side for bypass during startup.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 8 OF 9
3. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install tilt-control components, including electronic controller, electric actuator and linkage, thermostats, and sensors.
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural dunnage. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment to structural support with anchor bolts.
C. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions.[ Retain first paragraph below for suspended units. Retain option for projects in seismic areas.
D. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn-temper copper water tubing with soldered joints, same size as condensate drain connection.
H. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials: Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D. Connect cooling condensate drain pans with air seal trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in pipe direction.
E. Chilled and Hot Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 23 72 00 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PAGE 9 OF 9
union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
F. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
G. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.
END OF SECTION 23 72 00 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 1 OF 17
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Submittals will not be reviewed or accepted without a protective device coordination study report.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the following features:
1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Outdoor enclosure.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping" for day tanks. 2. Section 235100 "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for exhaust piping. 3. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:
1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 2 OF 17
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 3 OF 17
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B15.1.
F. Comply with NFPA 37.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with NFPA 99.
I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
J. Comply with UL 2200.
K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
L. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 4 OF 17
B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Generators:
a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Kohler Co. c. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. d. Spectrum Detroit Diesel. e. Generac Power Systems. Inc.
2. Load Banks:
a. Simplex. b. Load Tee.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 5 OF 17
2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.
1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.
C. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.
a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.
2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 2 seconds. 4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components. 9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.
a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 6 OF 17
10. Start Time, Not-to-Exceed One Second: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements, including load assumption. Maximum time period that load terminals of emergency power transfer switch can be without power is 10 seconds.
2.3 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.
D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator- set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 7 OF 17
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.
I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
J. Exhaust Piping External to Engine: Manufactured vent system per Section 235100 "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."
1. Provide explosion relief vent per manufacturer's recommendations.
K. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. 7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating. 8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 8 OF 17
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following:
1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for twenty-four hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
B. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2 system, and the following:
1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload.
C. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 9 OF 17
E. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.
1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm.
F. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush- mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
G. Interior Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.
H. Exterior Remote Emergency-Stop Switch on Exterior of Weatherproof Generator Enclosure: Glass break-type switch within weatherproof enclosure provided by generator manufacturer.
2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. Circuit breaker manufacturer to match manufacturer of electrical distribution equipment served by generator.
1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 5. Quantity: See riser drawings for size and quantity of circuit breakers.
B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.
1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 5. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions:
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 10 OF 17
1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. 2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds. 3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator circuit breaker(s), and shuts down the generator set. 4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.
D. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.
2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Permanent magnet type generator.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
C. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.
D. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
E. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.
F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.
G. Enclosure: Dripproof.
H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.
K. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
L. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.8 LOAD BANK
A. Description: Permanent, outdoor, weatherproof, remote-controlled, forced-air-cooled, resistive unit capable of providing a balanced 3-phase, delta-connected load to generator set at 75 percent rated-system capacity, at 80 percent power factor, lagging. Unit may be composed of
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 11 OF 17
separate resistive and reactive load banks controlled by a common control panel. Unit shall be capable of selective control of load in 25 percent steps and with minimum step changes of approximately 5 and 10 percent available.
B. Resistive Load Elements: Corrosion-resistant chromium alloy with ceramic and steel supports. Elements shall be double insulated and designed for repetitive on-off cycling. Elements shall be mounted in removable aluminized-steel heater cases.
C. Reactive Load Elements: Epoxy-encapsulated reactor coils.
D. Load-Bank Heat Dissipation: Radiator exhaust shall provide uniform cooling airflow through load elements. Airflow and coil operating current shall be such that, at maximum load, with ambient temperature at the upper end of specified range, load-bank elements operate at not more than 50 percent of maximum continuous temperature rating of resistance elements.
E. Load Element Switching: Remote-controlled contactors switch groups of load elements. Contactor coils are rated 120 V. Contactors shall be located in a separate NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure within load-bank enclosure, accessible from exterior through hinged doors with tumbler locks.
F. Contactor Enclosures: Heated by thermostatically controlled strip heaters to prevent condensation.
G. Load Bank Enclosures: Integral to generator radiator exhaust ductwork, complying with NEMA ICS 6.
H. Protective Devices: Power input circuits to load banks shall be fused, and fuses shall be selected to coordinate with generator circuit breaker. Fuse blocks shall be located in contactor enclosure. Cooling airflow and overtemperature sensors shall automatically shut down and lock out load bank until manually reset. Safety interlocks on access panels and doors shall disconnect load power, control, and heater circuits. Fan motor shall be separately protected by overload and short-circuit devices. Short-circuit devices shall be noninterchangeable fuses with 200,000-A interrupting capacity.
I. Remote-Control Panel: Separate from load bank in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with a control power switch and pilot light, and switches controlling groups of load elements.
J. Control Sequence: Control panel may be preset for adjustable single-step loading of generator during automatic exercising.
2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.
B. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:
1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building erected on concrete foundation. 2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 12 OF 17
4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components. 8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. 2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.
D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.
1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available. 2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable.
E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.
F. Sound Attenuation: -25 dB(A) minimum at one meter average. Maximum difference between any two readings used in average not-to-exceed 3 dB(A).
2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. 3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 13 OF 17
7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: .
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 14 OF 17
B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:
1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C. Install packaged engine generator on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in this section.
D. Install remote emergency stop switch(es) and remote annunciator in locations required by code with wiring per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 15 OF 17
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Provide power connection between a circuit breaker in the emergency distribution panel and the load bank. Size circuit breaker and conductors per recommendations of load bank manufacturer. Install wiring in raceway.
D. Provide all wiring between load bank remote control panel and load bank controls per manufacturer's recommendations in raceway.
E. Provide all wiring between load bank remote control panel and all automatic transfer switches in raceway.
F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Provide a sign at the building service entrance equipment indicating type and location of generator.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 16 OF 17
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float- charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine. 7. Fill sub-base tank with fuel oil. 8. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 9. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. 10. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 11. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
K. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PAGE 17 OF 17
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. As a minimum and in addition to the requirements of other sections, provide two (2) 8-hour days of owner training sessions in addition to multiple start-up visits to properly support the contractor. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1. Coordinate this training with that for transfer switches.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 1 OF 49
Part 1. GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all sections within Division 01 – General Requirements which are hereby a part of this Section of the Specifications.
B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the contract.
1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. The term Electrical Contractor as used herein, refers to the organization, individuals and their representatives who shall provide the conduit, wire, back boxes and high voltage installation and labor. Division 26 work relating to this specification shall be supplied by a Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
B. The term Theatrical Equipment Contractor as used herein, refers to the organization, individuals and their representatives who shall provide; the stage dimming and control equipment, circuit distribution, stage lighting fixtures, accessories, stage rigging, stage curtains, Audio and AV equipment, supervise system installation, provide low voltage wire, termination’s and system programming.
C. The term Owner and Architects as used herein refer to the organization(s), Individuals and their representatives as typically defined.
D. Technical terms peculiar to stage, audience, special lighting and related work shall be construed in the following order, in accordance with: 1. Captions on related drawings. 2. General recognized theatrical usage. 3. Relevant usage and definitions of handbooks, guidebooks, or trade-group recommendations by manufacturer's associations or professional and engineering societies such as UL, IES, SMPTE, NEC, NEMA and USITT.
1.03 CONTRACTOR APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Only Theatrical Equipment contractors with ETCP certified riggers on staff shall be used to supply equipment and labor for this section.
A. The work of this section shall be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 2 OF 49
B. The following list of Theatrical Equipment Contractors have staff ETCP certified riggers;
CAVT Solutions 55 Flagship Drive, N. Andover, MA Contact: Jeff Breen: 781-724-1724 . High Output 495 Turnpike Street, Canton, MA Contact: Mark Shore: 781-364-1800
Major Theatre Equipment Corp. 101 Holmes Street N. Quincy, MA Contact: Cameron Porter: 617-386-4441
D. Items 1 thru 5 below shall be included as part of the Bid submittal package.
1. Furnish proof that the Theatrical Equipment Contractor is factory certified to provide warranty service for equipment in this section. 2. Show proof that the Theatrical Equipment Contractor has an ETCP certified rigger on staff. Include a copy of the riggers ETCP Certificate with bid. 3. Provide proof that each Project Manager and each on site employee has an OSHA 10 hour card. Include a copy of the Project managers OSHA 10 card with the submittal. 4. Submit a certified statement from the bidder’s bonding company showing proof of bond ability for this segment of the work. 5. Each Bid shall be accompanied by a Bill of Materials, showing the quantity of each item to be furnished with the Manufacturer's name, quantity of each unit being provided, model and part number on all items listed in the Specification or proposed by the Manufacturer or Theatrical Equipment Contractor to be part of the total system.
E. In addition to above requirements, Contractor’s seeking to bid must submit the following to the Architect to be considered as a Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
1. A listing of 5 equivalent installations including (within a 50-mile radius of this job site): Submit using Appendix “A” reference list at end of section.
a. Name, address, and current telephone number of Owner.
b. Name, address, and current telephone number of Architect or theater consultant associated with the installation.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 3 OF 49
2. A brief written description of the contractor’s operation, including facilities, key personnel and biographical information of the project manager who shall be assigned to this project should the contractor be successful.
3. A statement or binder from the Theatrical Equipment Contractor’s Bonding company showing evidence of the ability to bonded for the amount bid, whether a bond is required or not.
4. A list of all sub-contractors who the Theatrical Equipment Contractor proposes to use including their qualifications to perform the work
5. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall maintain a factory authorized service center within a seventy-five (75) mile radius of the project. Submit the name or names of contractor’s factory authorized service representative, a brief resume of the service department’s personnel, a 24 hour service number that is not the manufacturer’s service center.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 260000 - Common Work Results for Electrical C. Section 260000 - Medium-Voltage Cables D. Section 260000 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable E. Section 260000 - Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables F. Section 260000 - Grounding and Bonding G. Section 260000 – Raceway and Boxes
1.05 SCOPE
A. Furnish Stage Dimming and Control equipment to Division 26 contractor for Installation.
B. Provide Stage Rigging and Drapery, Stage lighting fixtures, Accessories, Circuit distribution, hang and focus light plot as shown in the plans.
C. Provide Stage Audio and projection equipment, Conduit with pull strings shall be provided by the Division 26 contractor.
D. Due to the complexity of this renovation and the specific combination of equipment and services required for a professional installation, equipment in this specification shall be purchased from an approved the Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
E. This is a single source specification, one Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for supplying the stage dimming and control equipment, dead hung rigging, stage curtains, Audio and projection equipment, Project Management, Stage lighting fixtures, hanging, focusing and programming of the system prior to Owner’s possession.
F. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall be a sub contractor to and fully coordinated by the Electrical Contractor.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 4 OF 49
G. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for supervising the installation of the dimming and control equipment. Specifically; provide a full time Project Manager, to schedule shipments of equipment, coordinate deliveries, answer system inquiries, and generally oversee the installation of the Dimming and Control equipment, Stage rigging, Curtains, audio, projection in the theater and circuit distribution.
H. The Manufacturers shall furnish, in conjunction with the Theatrical Equipment Contractor, the following services:
1. Verification of dimensions and conditions in contract documents prior to equipment installation. 2. Schedule coordination and shipping to job site. 3. Termination all low voltage control wire. 4. Inspection and adjustment of completed installation by Factory Authorized personnel. 5. Programming of House lighting control system. 6. Eight sets of shop drawings and fabric samples for approval by Architect prior to fabrication. 7. Turn-on/Energization of the theatrical dimming system, initial programming of house lighting control system and training of all theatrical components. 8. Installation of dimming modules and house light control faceplates. 9. Coordination with associated trades in the field. 10. Submission of recorded drawings, service and operational data, test certificates and warranties. Provide 2 (two) copies of all operations manuals.
1.06 STANDARDS
A. All applicable requirements of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts govern work in this Specification.
B. All Equipment and work shall comply with NEC, NEMA and ANSI codes and standards.
C. All Equipment shall be UL listed. Proof of listing shall be provided.
D. All Equipment shall be New in the box with full factory warranty. Used or refurbished equipment is not allowed.
E. Catalog designations of Altman, JR Clancy, DBX, Epson, ETC, JBL, Lycian, Selecon and SSRC are referenced herein to establish standards of design, function and quality. Bidders submitting alternate equipment must meet or exceed the performance standards as listed by these manufacturers in catalogs and data sheets.
F. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor’s service representative shall be capable of responding to a service request within eight hours of notification
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 5 OF 49
G. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor’s service representative shall be capable of responding to a service request within eight hours of notification.
H. System apparatus, conduit and wiring shown on drawings are for estimating purposes only. Actual work will depend on furnished product’s Manufacturer’s standards. It is the submitting Theatrical Equipment Contractor's responsibility to ascertain Manufacturer's requirements prior to bidding. No claim or extra charge will be accepted for any variation from data shown on drawings or descriptions in specifications.
I. System rough in wiring and installation shall be made according to Manufacturer's instructions and wiring diagrams.
1.07 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. It is the intent of this specification to provide a complete Stage Lighting, Stage Audio, Projection and Rigging system as specified and enumerated herein and on the drawings, including delivery F.O.B. job site and installation.
B. All components, consoles, racks, devices and shall be complete and functioning units internally wired, complete to numbered terminal strips to facilitate connection to the building wiring system.
C. Where devices and material are mentioned by name and/or model number, it shall be interpreted as referring to that particular item as completely specified in the manufacturer's published data as though that data and literature were printed herein in their entirety.
D. Any cabinets, racks, or other components which must be separated from contiguous parts to enable shipment and/or handling at the site shall be furnished complete with all necessary connecting hardware, buss bars, wire jumpers to provide a complete, functioning system when reassembled in the building.
E. Check actual site conditions, ceiling support positions and openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
1.08 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this section shall be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
B. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall examine the plans and specifications in detail to familiarize him or herself with the scope of work.
C. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall furnish all equipment specified herein and shown on the drawings, including low voltage control wire as required by the dimming and audio manufacturers. Furnish and install the stage lighting fixtures and accessories as enumerated in the specifications.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 6 OF 49
D. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall coordinate the control wire conduit and device locations with the electrical contractor to insure wiring paths meet the requirements of the stage lighting and audio equipment manufacturers.
E. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall provide and terminate all audio and theatrical low voltage system control devices.
F. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall provide the dimming system energization and two (2) copies of all system manuals, and system warranties.
G. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall uncrate, assemble, and set DMX assignments, lamp hang, connect to stage dimmer circuits and aim all stage lighting fixtures specified herein, shown on the drawings or on a Light Plot.
H. Demonstrate the stage lighting fixtures in the presence of the Owner or Architect or Architect’s Representative, proving them to be operating properly and provide instructions in the use and in the Owner performed maintenance of the fixtures and accessories.
B. Provide one (2) additional, four (4) hour training period separate from the Manufacturer’s demonstration and offered at the convenience of the Owner's schedule, for lighting console training, fixture operation and dimming system maintenance procedures. Owner shall be permitted to video record training sessions at Owner’s expense.
I. Provide all labor and materials for the installation of two (2) Torm pipes on either side of the proscenium as shown on plans. Verify Stage Electrics pipes, curtain and track pipes are hung according to ETCP standards. If not up to standard, replace and rehang.
J. Replace existing Truss Connector strip with new and added NET/DMX output.
K. Furnish and install new dead hung stage rigging pipes and side masking pipes
L. Furnish and Install stage drapery and track as described in the specifications and drawings.
M. Provide all labor and materials for the installation of the Projector and projection screen complete with remote screen control. Screen shall be dead hung. Provide a rolling cart for the Projector.
N. Furnish and Install Stage Audio /Video System as shown on the plans and specifications.
O. Furnish and terminate the DMX/NET equipment panels as described in the specifications.
P. Provide a full time project manager to coordinate the construction schedule and other services listed in this Section.
Q. The following matrix of responsibilities is intended to provide a guide for delineating the work between the Theatrical Equipment Contractor and the Electrical Contractor.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 7 OF 49
Theatrical Equipment Division of Responsibilities Electrical Contractor Contractor ITEM Furnish Install Furnish Install All High voltage wire X X Low voltage wire for Dimming system. X X Low voltage wire for Fire alarms, security and other systems. X X Theatre Audio, video and Clear-com communications low voltage wire X X Conduit with pull strings for theatre Audio and Video X X All conduit, raceways and interconnecting boxes X X High voltage wire testing and labeling X X Control wire continuity, testing and labeling X X Labeling back boxes and conduit X X Junction Boxes X X Power (High Voltage) Terminations X X Provide terminations for all dimmer load circuits X X Termination of Dimming system low voltage wire X Architectural Control - House lighting back boxes X X Dimmer Racks, Audio Rack, motor control or cabinets X X Theatrical Control Devices X X Stage Circuit Distribution Raceways and Boxes X X Mounting of Stage Circuit Raceways to Pipes X X Theatrical Lighting Fixture Installation and testing X X Theatrical Lighting Fixture Focus X X Stage & House Lighting Initial programming X X Proscenium Torm Pipes X X Power and control conduit and wire for FOH hoist X X Stage curtains and Stage Rigging X X Installation of Audio speakers X X Installation of Projector and screen X X Power and control conduit and wire X X
1.09 NOT INCLUDED
A. The following work, although in another section, has significant impact on the scope of this work. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor is responsible for the successful coordination of the following.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 8 OF 49
1. System conduit, both high and low voltage 2. Installation of low voltage wire (Audio wire installed by Theater Equip. Contractor) 3. Installation and termination of Line Supply 4. Installation and termination of load wire 5. Connector strip/distribution load wire termination 6. Dimmer, network switch and DMX splitter rack installation
1.10 PRODUCTS / MANUFACTURERS
A. Products are specified based on the following equipment:
Manufacturer Item
ETC Stage Dimming, Lighting control, 3030 Laura Lane Stage Lighting Fixtures Middleton, WI 53562
Lycian Stage Lighting Stage Lighting Fixtures/Follow spots Kings Highway (Robert Juliat or Strong are equal) Sugar Loaf, NY 10981
Altman Stage Lighting Stage Lighting, Fresnels 57 Alexander Street Yonkers, NY 10701
SSRC Circuit Distribution Equipment 11 Freedom Court (ETC or Altman are Equal) Greer, SC 29650
Note that, notwithstanding the product designations listed herein, it is the Bidder’s responsibility to meet or exceed the functional criteria described or implied by the product descriptions (Parts 2 thru 5).
A. For use of non-specified manufacturers refer to section 013300 – Submittal Procedures of substitution requirements.
1.11 SUBMITTALS DUE
A. Submit all items as may be required under the General Conditions and this Specification.
B. Submit within 30 days of bid acceptance for review and approval by the Architect or Architect’s Representative; eight (8) complete sets of shop drawings, riser diagrams, detailed parts list, pin configurations and cut sheets.
C. Complete product descriptions including any changes required in the wiring schematic shown on the bid drawings to connect the proposed system into the building.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 9 OF 49
Proposals, which do not provide adequate data for product evaluation and installation criteria, shall not be considered.
D. Indicate all variations from these specifications on submittal drawings.
E. Prior to the commencement of fabrication and delivery, the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall submit for approval to the Architect, an outline of a proposed commencement and completion schedule of the project requirements.
1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. The fabrication of all equipment shall incorporate only new and unused materials. This includes all metal components in various shapes required such as plate, bar, rod, castings, structural, stampings, forging, clamps, bolts, and all other accessories not mentioned.
B. The mechanical fabrication and workmanship shall incorporate neat and mechanically acceptable practices such as clean drilled and punched holes without flash; hand smooth finish for all sheared, machined, and cut edges; and proper fit of component and contiguous parts without irregularity where matching is intended. Welding shall meet qualifications of AWS D1, 1-81 and shall be without spatter and other evidence of poor practice. All bolts and rivets shall be sized and located in conformity with minimum acceptable standards as set forth in the Machinery’s Handbook and all revisions to date.
C. All moving parts shall have acceptable tolerances, mountings, connections, and accessories coordinated into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. No wood construction or equipment shall be incorporated into the system excepting as may be set forth in the specifications.
D. All electrical and electronic parts and components selected and installed shall be consistent with good practice and conservatively rated in their use in the circuit design. Each piece of equipment shall meet accepted basic engineering standards.
E. All low voltage control wire runs shall be one continuous run. No splices are permitted.
1.13 FIELD ENGINEERING SERVICES
A. Manufacturer shall furnish engineering assistance as needed during delivery and installation to the Theatrical Equipment Contractor. A qualified Field Engineer shall check the installation prior to initial energization of the system. The Field Engineer shall supervise initial turn-on and shall make or cooperate with the Theatrical Equipment Contractor in making any required adjustments or trimming of components to enable the system to function as specified.
B. The Field Engineer shall be fully experienced in the programming requirements of both theatrical and architectural controllers and shall assist the Owner with all necessary on- site programming.
C. The Field Engineer shall demonstrate the system in the presence of the Owner and the Architect or Architect’s Representative, proving it to be operating properly. Provide instructions in the use and in the Owner performed maintenance of the system.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 10 OF 49
D. Provide Instruction in system operation, lighting control console programming and system maintenance on two (2) separate occasions. These instruction sessions shall be a minimum four-hour period separate from the manufacturers training demonstration and offered at the convenience of the Owner’s schedule.
E. Provide time and manpower to verify that all stage lighting circuits are properly wired by testing each during the system energization.
1.14 TESTING
F. Standard factory tests of Manufacturer’s equipment shall be performed and two (2) typewritten copies submitted to the Architect for record purposes.
B. Provide for final adjustments to systems, the adjustments shall accomplish at least the following: 1. Provide smooth, continuous light level control from zero percent light output through full light output for both increasing and decreasing light levels. 2. Limit dimmer output voltage to incandescent circuits of house lighting to between 90 and 95 percent of the rated lamp voltage. 3. Eliminate all radio frequency interference 4. Verify each DMX output device is working to ESTA standards. 5. Demonstrate that each installed curtain track runs smooth, is free from squeaks and smooth in operation.
C. During testing and adjustment of the systems it will be necessary to rearrange portable fixtures from circuit to circuit in order to test each dimmer outlet for compliance with operating requirements.
1.15 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES
A. All equipment and components shall be approved and listed by U/L where applicable standards have been established. This approval applies specifically but is not limited to Dimmers, Dimmer and Power Racks, Breaker Panels, Devices, and Fixtures.
B. All equipment and materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest editions of ANSI, NEC, NEMA, U/L, ASA, AIEE, and IPECA standards.
1.16 NOTIFICATION
A. Upon notification of completion of work, the Architect or Architect’s Representative will run tests on the Lighting, and Rigging system. If any problem arises during the tests, the Theatrical Equipment Contractor must correct the problem within 5 working days.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 11 OF 49
1.17 WARRANTY
A. All systems, including all parts and labor, shall be under full warranty for a period of not less than two (2) years from the date of written final acceptance. In the event that any of the equipment should fail to produce capacities or meet design characteristics as specified, it shall be replaced with equipment that will meet requirements without additional cost. After occupancy, any necessary work performed shall be done at the convenience of the Owner’s operational schedule, including overtime, if required.
B. Two signed copies of the above are required as a condition for final approval of the work.
Part 2. STAGE DIMMING AND LIGHTING PRODUCTS
2.01 DRd SERIES DIMMING RACK
A. Mechanical
1. The rack enclosure shall be the Unison DRd Series Control Enclosure as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or, Philips/Strand.
2. The Rack Enclosure shall be a surface mounted, dead front switchboard, constructed of 18-guage formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter. a. Filter shall be removable for easy cleaning. b. The enclosure shall support one control processor and one station power module plus accessories. c. The enclosure door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the control module face panel.
3. All rack components shall be properly treated and finished. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, powder-based epoxy paint. Top, bottom, and side knockouts shall facilitate conduit entry.
4. The fully digital dimming rack shall be available with six or twelve dimmer module spaces and one control module space. Rack dimensions and weights (without modules) shall not exceed:
a. DRd 6 21.9” H x 17” W x 9.6” D 38 lb.
b. DRd 12 31” H x 17” W x 9.6” D 51lb.
5. A single low-noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. The fan shall draw all intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter, over the surfaces of the module housing and out the top of the rack.
a. The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not exceed 40°C/104°F.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 12 OF 49
b. In the event of an over-temperature condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down. An orange indicator LED will flash and an error message shall appear on the Control Processor.
6. Rack Enclosure shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of dimming and control modules without the use of tools. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control wire terminations.
7. Rack Enclosure shall support use of any combination of rack option cards designed to provide additional rack features. Rack option cards shall include:
a. FLO – The Fluorescent Option Board shall provide termination for 4 wire low voltage electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts. FLO shall provide 24, 0- 10Vdc outputs.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 13 OF 49
6. Optional floor mounting stands shall be available for the 12-module rack.
7. Dimming racks shall be designed for use with AX series auxiliary racks for MCB and cross bussing applications.
8. Accessories:
a. RideThru Option (RTO) 1) The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, short-term back-up power source for the control electronics. 2) The short-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. 3) The short-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power. 4) The short-term back-up power source shall support the control electronics for at least 10 seconds.
b. BatteryPack Option (BPO) 1) The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, long-term back-up power source for the control electronics. 2) The long-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. 3) The long-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power. 4) A test switch/indicator shall be available without opening the rack door or removal of any modules/components. 5) The long-term back-up power source shall supply power to the control electronics for at least 90 minutes.
B. ELECTRICAL
1. Rack enclosures shall be available in 100, 120, 230 and 277 volt, 3 phase, main lug configurations.
2. Rack enclosures shall be supplied pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall be required to provide input feed, load, and control wiring.
3. Standard Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) shall be 22,000 at 100-277 Volt
a. Higher SCCR ratings, up to 100,000 SCCR, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure.
4. All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 14 OF 49
5. Rack enclosures shall support dimming for incandescent, fluorescent, neon, cold cathode, electronic low voltage and magnetic low voltage transformer load types.
6. The rack enclosure shall support 16-bit DMX input
7. The rack enclosure shall support 65,000 steps of dimming.
8. The rack enclosure dimming engine shall support multiple dimmer curves including modified square law, linear, switched, fluorescent, pre-heat and electronic low voltage.
9. The rack enclosure shall support voltage regulation including, minimum and maximum scale voltages with offsets
10. Rack enclosure shall support a UL924 listed contact input for emergency lighting control bypass.
a. Emergency lighting input shall support load shedding
11. Rack enclosures shall be designed to support the following wire terminations:
a. AC (single phase)
b. Echelon link power (Belden 8471 or equivalent)
c. 24Vdc (2- 16AWG Wire)
d. DMX512A Port A (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent)
e. DMX512A Port B (Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent)
f. RS232 Serial In/Out (Belden 9729 or equivalent)
g. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5/5e Ethernet
h. Contact Closure In (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)
i. Contact Closure Out (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)
12. Station Power Modules
a. Station power modules shall provide LinkPower for up to 32 stations and 1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power.
b. Station power repeater modules shall provide LinkPower for 30 stations and1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power.
c. Station power module shall support over-current/short protection for LinkPower and Auxiliary (AUX) power. LinkPower shall support fault detection on each leg of the balanced data bus.
13. All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 15 OF 49
14. Main feed lugs shall accept a maximum of 350 MCM wire.
15. Load terminals shall accept a maximum of #6 AWG wire.
C. THERMAL
1. Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F
2. Ambient humidity: 10-90% non-condensing
2.02 CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES
A. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., Philips/Strand or Crestron.
B. Mechanical
1. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.
2. DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.
3. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multi-scene lighting and building control.
4. ACP module electronics shall be contained in a plug-in assembly.
a. The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire connections.
1) No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion.
5. The ACP shall be convection cooled.
6. User Interface
a. The ACP shall utilize a backlit liquid crystal display capable of graphics and eight lines of text.
b. The ACP shall provide an alpha-numeric keypad for data entry and navigation.
c. The ACP shall provide a touch-sensitive control wheel for navigation.
d. The ACP shall provide shortcut buttons to assist in navigation, selection, and data entry.
e. The ACP keypad, buttons, and wheel shall be backlit for use in low-light conditions.
1) The backlight shall have a user selectable time out, including no time out.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 16 OF 49
7. The ACP shall provide a front-panel RJ45 jack for Ethernet connection to the processor for configuration, live control, and web-browser-based system access.
a. The Ethernet port shall be secured behind the locking door.
8. The ACP shall provide a Secure Digital (SD) Removable Media slot on the front panel for transfer of configuration data.
a. The SD slot shall be secured behind the locking door.
9. The ACP shall provide a Universal Serial Bus (USB) port on the front panel for transfer of configuration data.
a. The USB port shall be secured behind the locking door.
10. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash memory, which does not require battery backup.
a. The ACP shall provide a Compact Flash (CF) Card as backup flash memory and storage.
b. The CF Card is stored in the back of the ACP, and can be accessed only by removing the ACP.
c. The ACP data can be exchanged by inserting the CF card into another ACP.
C. Electrical
1. The ACP shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure.
2. The ACP shall require low-voltage power supplied by the Dimming or Control enclosure.
3. The ACP shall be hot-swap capable.
4. The ACP shall support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button stations, button/fader stations, Touchscreen stations, sensors, and third party LonMARK compliant products.
a. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit. Touchscreen stations, interface stations and portable stations connectors will also require (2) #16 AWG wires.
b. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 17 OF 49
c. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) without a repeater. Repeater option modules shall be available to increase wiring maximums in increments of 1640 ft. (500m).
d. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).
5. The ACP shall support 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant Ethernet networking using TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols for internal communication and integration with third-party equipment.
6. The ACP shall support EIA-RS232 serial protocol for bi-directional command and communication with third-party equipment.
7. The ACP shall support two discrete ESTA DMX512A ports, configurable as input or output ports.*
a. *When used in a Dimming Enclosure, the second port is always an output port.
8. The ACP shall provide four onboard dry contact closure inputs for integration with third-party products.
9. The ACP shall provide four onboard contact closure outputs, rated at 1A@30VDC, for integration with third-party equipment.
D. Functional
1. Capacity a. Shall support 1024 channels of control b. Shall support 2 physical DMX ports, each of which may be configured as an input or output
2. System a. Runtime application shall utilize support Net3 system interoperability b. System shall support the use of Network Time Protocol for real time clock synchronization c. System shall support remote firmware upload an over Ethernet connection from a connected PC running the Light Designer software or another connected processor. d. System shall support local firmware upload from removable media (SD Card, USB Flash Drive)
3. Diagnostics a. Shall output an Event log b. Standard log shall store a fixed-length history of recent activity
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 18 OF 49
c. Separate critical log shall only store important messages (such as boot-up settings)
4. Configuration Data a. Configuration Data can be uploaded over an Ethernet connection from a PC running Light Designer application b. Configuration Data can be retrieved from another Paradigm Processor c. A Paradigm Processor shall make its configuration data available for retrieval by another Processor as a backup/recovery mechanism d. Configuration Data shall be stored on solid-state media that can be removed to facilitate transfer between Processor units e. Configuration Data may be loaded to and from removable media access provided on front panel f. Configuration Data for the entire System shall be available for download from any single Processor g. Shall store configuration data for Dimming enclosure processors and shall make available for download
5. Scalability a. Adding additional Processors to a System shall proportionately increase its overall capabilities up to a maximum System size b. The maximum number of Processors configured as a System shall be at least 12. c. Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to remain time synchronized and share control information d. Multiple Processors shall utilize the Ethernet network to maintain configuration data synchronization as modifications are made e. Failure of a single Processor shall not prohibit continuing operation of the remaining Processors f. It shall be possible for multiple Systems to coexist on the same physical network with logical isolation between Systems
6. Local User Interface a. Shall provide access to Processor setup (IP address) b. Shall provide access to Processor status and diagnostics c. Where the Processor is installed within a Dimming enclosure, shall provide access to Dimming enclosure setup, status and diagnostics d. Shall provide control functionality for Control Channels, Zones, Fixtures, Groups, Presets, Macros, Walls and Sequences within the current configuration. e. Shall provide functionality to schedule astronomical and real time events (add/edit/delete)
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 19 OF 49
f. Shall allow for display of local DMX information g. Shall allow for transfer of log files to local removable media h. Shall allow to perform firmware upgrades for connected Dimming enclosures i. Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from Dimming enclosures using removable media j. Shall allow for transfer of configuration to and from LCD Stations using removable media k. Shall allow for binding of Stations
7. Access Controls a. There shall be 2 user accounts – Administrator, and User with separate password protection b. Account and password settings shall be local to each Processor c. Access Controls shall be applied to certain areas of the Paradigm Local User Interface and Web Interface
8. Web User Interface a. Shall be an internal web server accessible via Ethernet port b. Shall support common web browsers on Windows and Mac platforms c. Shall provide functionality to Activate and Deactivate Presets d. Shall provide functionality to schedule timed events (add/delete) e. Shall display status information f. Shall display log files g. Shall allow for configuration of Processor settings (date, time) h. Shall allow for upload and download of configuration data i. There shall be links to other web-enabled devices in the System, including other Paradigm Processors
9. Stations a. Stations shall be connected to a Paradigm Processor via a LinkPower network or Ethernet b. Station discovery and binding shall be accomplished from the Local User Interface or Light Designer
10. Net3 and ACN Devices a. Net3 Devices shall be connected to and controlled from Paradigm Processors via Ethernet b. Paradigm Processors shall provide DMX-Net3 gateway functionality c. It shall be possible to send and receive Macro triggers defined within the System configuration via Net3
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 20 OF 49
d. There shall be support for Streaming ACN on up to 24 universes per Processor
11. Operation a. When contained in an dimming enclosure, a snapshot of the dimming enclosure output data shall be stored in persistent memory so that hardware can access it for immediate output on boot b. DMX output refresh rate shall be configurable c. There shall be support for 16-bit DMX Attributes d. DMX inputs may be patched to DMX and Streaming ACN outputs as external sources e. Streaming ACN inputs shall be patched to DMX outputs (gateway) as external sources f. Where there are multiple external sources then priority and HTP shall be used to perform arbitration g. External and internal sources shall be arbitrated based on user-selection of standard or custom rules h. On Preset Record, the values of Attributes within the Preset shall be updated to reflect the current output i. The total output may be the combination of many different Presets running concurrently j. There shall be no hard limit on number of concurrent cross fades k. Multiple Presets controlling the same Attribute shall first interact based on priority and second based on Latest Takes Precedence(LTP) or Highest Takes Precedence (HTP) l. LTP and HTP operation shall be supported simultaneously and interact (at the same priority) using HTP m. Settings due to LTP Presets may be automatically discarded from operation when overridden n. It shall be possible to specify that a Preset or Attribute Control will persist when overridden o. A Preset may be designated as an HTP Override and shall cause HTP values to be discarded p. It shall be possible to modify the rate of a Preset (Cross fades, Effects) from a Control within the System q. Each Preset shall have a status that can be Activated, Deactivated or Altered r. Preset status may be set based on matching levels in the current output as an option s. On startup the System shall be capable of automatically executing timed events within the previous 24 hours to synchronize its initial output state with the current time of day
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 21 OF 49
12. Serial Input/Output a. RS232 shall support 8-bit word length, parity selection and 1 or 2 stop bits b. RS232 shall support baud rates from 4800 to 115,200 bps c. Serial input and output messages are fully customizable d. Serial output messages can be generated by any Control or Event
2.03 DIMMER MODULES
A. Mechanical
1. ETC dimmer modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks. Philips/Strand or Creston are equal.
2. Dimmer modules shall consist of a heavy-duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with an integral faceplate. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine- texture, scratch-resistant gray epoxy powder coat.
3. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts.
4. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, catalog number and rating.
5. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a single field-replaceable housing.
B. Electrical
1. Each dimmer shall consist of the following components:
a. One or two single-pole circuit breakers 1) Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient temperature. 2) Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times normal current. 3) Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty applications.
b. A solid-state switching module 1) Each dimmer module shall use a solid-state relay (SSR) consisting of two silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating circuitry on the high-voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation shall not be acceptable.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 22 OF 49
2) The SSR shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for temperature sensing, and silver-plated control and load contacts. 3) The entire SSR shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace. 4) Dimmer modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease, or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable.
c. Toroidal filters
1) Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise time resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors.
2) Modules shall be available in models offering 200-500 microsecond filter rise times depending upon model. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew rate (about 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output waveform with the dimmer operating at full load.
d. Power and control connectors 1) Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module is not installed. 2) Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS. 3) The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer. 4) Standard AIC fault current protection shall be 10,000 at 120V and 14,000 at 277V.
2.06 REMOTE PLUG-IN-STATIONS
A. General
1. The Remote Plug-in Stations shall consist of the appropriate connectors required for the system in use. These stations shall be available with DMX input or output, Remote Focus Unit, ETCNet, or architectural control connectors. Custom control connectors shall be available.
B. Connector Options
2. The following standard components shall be available for Remote Plug-in Stations: a. 5-Pin male XLR connectors for DMX input b. 5-Pin female XLR connectors for DMX output c. RJ45 connectors for ETCNet connections – Twisted Pair
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 23 OF 49
3. Custom combinations and custom control connections shall be available.
C. Physical
4. Station faceplates shall be .80” aluminum, finished in fine texture, scratch-resistant black powder coat. Silk-screened graphics shall be white.
5. The station panel shall mount into an industry standard back box, depending on size and quantity of connectors. A terminal block shall be supplied for contractor terminations.
2.07 CONTROLS
A. Mechanical
1. Preset/Fader Stations a. Unison Preset/Fader stations shall operate using up to twelve programmable buttons and sixteen programmable faders with integral LEDs. b. Fader stations shall utilize standard 45-millimeter slide potentiometers. c. All Preset and Fader stations shall be available with white, ivory, gray or black faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons. All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting. d. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment. e. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations.
2. LCD Stations a. LCD stations shall consist of a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) with a touchscreen interface. The LCD station shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on up to 30 separate programmable control pages. b. Flush or surface wall mounted stations shall be available with white, ivory, gray and black faceplates. c. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall have no visible means of attachment. d. The manufacturer shall provide back boxes for all LCD stations. 1) Flush back box dimensions shall be 5.25H x 8.5W x 3.25D. 2) Surface back box dimensions shall be 5.75H x 9.12W x 3.25D. e. LCD stations shall be available in white and black portable desktop consoles with cable and connector. f. It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. It shall also be possible to program the station to dim to any level during periods of inactivity.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 24 OF 49
3. Connector Stations
a. Unison connector stations shall provide an interface to a PC or portable Unison stations.
b. Unison connector stations shall be available in flush- or surface- mounted back boxes with white, ivory, gray or black faceplates.
c. All station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment.
4. Unison Switch Interface
a. The Switch Interface assembly shall be designed to provide 8-dry- maintained or momentary contact input or output signals for interface to associated systems.
b. Switch Interface assemblies shall flush or surface mount in standard a 14”W x 11”H x 3”D back box. (Back box by ETC)
B. Electrical
1. Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network.
2. Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit).
3. LCD stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.
4. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run or any combination of these.
5. Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations.
C. Functional
1. The Unison Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Preset/Fader, LCD, IR or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, macros and time clock events.
a. System presets shall be programmable via Preset/Fader, LCD or Light Manager software.
1) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond.
2) Presets shall be selectable via button, fader, IR transmitter, time clock event, macro activation or switch interface stations.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 25 OF 49
b. System macros (sequences) shall be programmable via Light Manager system software.
1) Macro sequence steps shall include preset selection, wall status change, station property change (template), zone property change, timed delay, jump to macro, and stop macro.
2) Macro sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or Light Manager software.
c. System time clock events shall be programmable via Light Manager system software.
1) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types.
2) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using daylight savings time.
2. Station (Preset/Fader, LCD or IR) control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via Light Manager, the Windows-based configuration program.
a. Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, cue light, or room join/separate.
b. Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control.
3. Stations (Preset/Fader, LCD and IR) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via Light Manager. LCD stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code and visibility levels.
4. LCD stations shall support import of bitmap images files to custom LCD control pages.
5. LCD stations shall support the control of DMX512 automated fixtures via graphic XY faders.
2.08 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING:
1 DRd-12/24 Unison dimmer rack 120 volt (24 dimmers)
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 26 OF 49
1 P-ACP Paradigm Architectural Control Processor 1 P-SPM Paradigm Station Power Module 6 D20 Dual 20A Dimmer Modules 2.4kw – 350 ms 6 R20 Dual 20A relay modules. 1 CC20 Dual 20 amp constant module (spare) 1 DRd-FLO Fluorescent Option Board for 0 - 10 volt control of LED house lighting 1 Door Locking Door with filter 1 URTO Ride Thru Option for Unison DRd rack or Battery Back-up UPS 2 LCD-P 7” LCD Touchscreen master control station 1 UH10005-10F Paradigm – 5 Button Control Station 2 UH10002-10F Paradigm – 2 Button entry Control Station Existing SR24 Dimmer Rack SR 24 Power package upgrade, new back plane, new 3 year 1 PWRPKG SR24 warranty and new CEM. ELTS 1 EDBK Emergency Bypass Detection Kit Four 20 amp circuit Emergency Lighting Transfer Switch, 120 volt 1 ELTS-2-4-120V discrete feed. 1 Sense kit Three Phase power Sense kit for ELTS
2.10 CONNECTOR STRIPS
A. GENERAL
1. The assembly shall be extruded aluminum, electrostatic painted finish in black.
2. Pigtails where indicated shall be 18” long and be rubber covered SO or ST and shall be secured to the plug strip or box by bushed strain relief clamps.
3. All circuits shall be labeled in white characters in correspondence with the circuit schedule.
a. Connector Plug Strips in 2” characters above the receptacle. b. Pipe or Surface Mounting Boxes 3/4” characters above the receptacle. c. Wall or Floor pockets 3/4” characters below the receptacle.
4. The entire assembly shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
B. CONNECTOR STRIPS (SL or BAL)
1. This assembly shall consist of a black extruded aluminum enclosure, either 2.5” x 3.375”, or 3.75 x 4.75” in cross section and come in the lengths specified, containing terminal strips for feed conduit and wire extending to 20 Amp flush mount stage pin female connectors.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 27 OF 49
2. Housing shall be fabricated of .125” extruded aluminum alloy # 6063-T5. Cover sections shall be interlocking, and formed of the same aluminum alloy. Housing shall be inherently rustproof.
3. The strip shall contain 125 degree C – XLP wiring of the proper sizes and quantities to connect the individual outlets to the terminal blocks in circuits of capacity as specified.
4. The terminal blocks shall be molded barrier type with screw lugs suitable for connecting multi-conductor feed cable or incoming wire.
5. BAL units shall accept 20, 30, 50, 60 and 100 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire devices in either flush or pigtail receptacles.
6. Strips shall be supplied with .125” thick by 1.5” steel C-channel mounting brackets. Brackets shall be custom manufactured to secure connector strip to beams positions as shown on the drawings.
C. SURFACE MOUNT BOX (SM)
1. This assembly shall consist of a black extruded aluminum enclosure, 3.75 x 4.75” in cross section and come in the lengths specified, containing terminal strips for feed conduit and wire extending to receptacles ( flush mount or pigtail), as specified.
2. Housing shall be fabricated of .125” extruded aluminum alloy # 6063-T5. Cover sections shall be interlocking, and formed of the same aluminum alloy. Housing shall be inherently rustproof.
3. The box shall be completely prewired at the factory, with ground lugs installed.
4. Finish shall be black matte enamel.
D. RECESS MOUNT BOX (RM)
1. This assembly shall consist of a 16 gauge, galvanized steel housing designed for recessed mounting in the wall. The unit shall be provided with a 16 gauge steel oversized face plate.
2. Each box shall contain one flush mount 20 amp stage pin connector and one 520R duplex outlet.
3. The box shall be completely prewired at the factory, with ground lugs installed.
4. Finish shall be black matte enamel.
E. PROVIDE
1. Provide custom mounting brackets, surface mounting brackets and back boxes as required by the locations shown on the plans.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 28 OF 49
2. Provide complete submittal drawings detailing connector strip size, mounting bracket type and circuit numbering for approval prior to fabrication.
CS# Type Length Circuit # CS-1 FOH – Truss cage 24’-0” Dim. 1 - 12, Relays 43 & 44, DMX/Gateway CS-2 1st Elec. 42’-0” Dim. 13 - 18, Relays 45 & 46, DMX/Gateway CS-3 2nd Elec. 42’-0” Dim. 19 - 24, Relays 47 & 48, DMX/Gateway WB-1 Recess Box N/A Dimmer 25 - 27, & DMX/Gateway WB-2 Recess Box N/A Dimmer 28 - 30, & DMX/Gateway WB-3 Recess Box N/A Dimmer 31 - 34, & DMX/Gateway JB Junction Boxes Provide as required. Cable 12 gauge Multi Provide as required.
2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER SYSTEM
A. GENERAL
1. The Emergency Lighting Transfer System (ELTS2) shall provide automatic transfer of branch circuits from normal to emergency power when normal power fails. Each system shall consist of power transfer switches and a control circuitry interconnected to provide complete, automatic protection.
2. The ELTS shall transfer designated lighting load branch circuits from dimmers or secondary control outputs to a second power source in the event of a loss of power to the dimmer rack, a normal system failure, or activation of fire alarm.
3. The system shall comply with ANSI / UL1008 Transfer Switch Equipment, ANSI / NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems, and ANSI / NFPA 70 (NEC), including Article 700, 701 and 702 safety standards. Emergency transfer systems that do not comply with the below stated NEC articles and sections shall not be permitted
a. Satisfies requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70): 1) Article 700 – Emergency Systems 2) Article 701 – Legally Required Standby Systems 3) Article 702 – Optional Standby Systems 4) Section 518.3(C) – Assembly Occupancies 5) Section 520.7 – Theatres and Similar Locations 6) Section 540.11(C) – Motion Picture Projection Rooms
4. Emergency Transfer equipment shall comply with the US seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) for equipment in the emergency life-safety chain and be approved for seismic applications. Seismic certification shall include
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 29 OF 49
installation applications for Roof, Grade, Below Grade, and Intermediate Level installation in the USA with an Ss level of 3.42 and SDS level of 2.28. Emergency transfer equipment that does not meet or exceed the seismic acceptance criteria for non-structural components and systems per the applicable building code or as set forth in the ICC AC-156 shall not be acceptable.
5. The ELTS shall be a self-contained system for up to 24 circuits at 20 amps and available for single or three phase power (120/208V, 120/240V or 277/480V). The unit shall be available with either discrete emergency branch circuit feeds from an external circuit breaker panel (by others) or emergency main feed with built-in branch circuit distribution and over current protection.
B. Transfer Switch
1. The switch shall be a UL 1008 LISTED, electrically operated and mechanically held (maintained) transfer switch.
2. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or momentary outages so constant contact pressure is maintained and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized.
3. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of the two possible positions, either Normal or Emergency.
4. Each switch shall be configured as guaranteed break-before-make
5. Built-in fuses shall provide up to 65000A Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) on connected emergency circuits.
6. Built-in fuses class G shall be provided on each output for compliance with NEC Section 700.27 Coordination – larger upstream breakers cannot be tripped by downstream branch circuit faults.
7. Switch contacts shall withstand transfer without welding, with 180º phase displacement between Normal and Emergency power sources, both sources energized and with 80% load.
8. Transfer switch contacts shall be rated for mixed loads, including electric discharge lamps and tungsten filament lamps.
9. Transfer switches shall be rated for 6000 cycles at full tungsten load.
10. Control Circuit
11. The control circuitry shall direct the operation of the transfer switch.
12. User configurable timing delays shall be provided for power transfer between:
13. Loss of normal power and the transfer to emergency up to 10 seconds.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 30 OF 49
14. Restoration of normal power and the transfer from emergency back to normal power up to 60 seconds.
15. A normally closed dry contact closure fire alarm input shall be provided.
16. Transfer switch shall support connections for up to 5 Remote Stations which can manually switch between normal and emergency power.
C. Operation
1. Transfer to alternate supply will occur when normal supply voltage drops below 80V when used at 120V, or 185V for the A phase and 80V for the B and C phase when used at 277V.
2. A self-supervising isolated signal input shall be provided for connection to the facility fire alarm. The ELTS2 shall automatically transfer the loads to the Emergency power source when the facility fire alarm is activated as part of a normally-closed loop.
3. A key-operated switch shall be provided to manually control the ELTS2. All automatic functions shall override this control. Two indicator lights shall be provided to show the position of the transfer switch.
4. All automatic functions shall override remote control functions. Any combination of open or shorted wiring to remote stations shall not affect automatic functions, or disable the local switch.
D. Enclosure
5. The ELTS2 shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 interior or NEMA 4 watertight type enclosure finished in textured epoxy paint. It shall be equipped with a hinged locking door. Material shall be no less than 14 gauge steel.
6. An enclosure containing no more than 12 (twelve) 20A circuits shall be 36”H x 24”W x 8.5”D.
7. An enclosure containing up to 24 (twenty-four) 20A circuits shall be 48”H x 30”W x 8.5”D.
8. The enclosure shall provide power distribution and branch circuit protection for all emergency power circuits. Systems requiring external emergency power circuit protection shall not be acceptable.
9. The enclosure shall be separate and independent of all other equipment. In no instance shall the ELTS2 be enclosed in a dimmer rack or in an enclosure containing other equipment.
10. The system shall be provided with an approved overlay mounted on the front of the enclosure, stating, “EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER SYSTEM”.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 31 OF 49
The enclosure shall be provided with an approved label indicating that the system is UL1008 LISTED. ETC- ELTS2, Stage Craft Industries or LEX Products shall be the basis of design for this equipment; the unit shall be 4 – 120 volt 20 amp circuits and have a 3Phase main power feed.
2.12 STAGE LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. All stage lighting fixtures shall be provided with a C-clamp, a color frame, safety cable with spring clip, 36” 3 wire leads in black sleeving, and a 20A grounded stage pin connector installed.
2. Unpack, lamp, bench focus, install and focus the stage lighting fixtures in the auditorium according to light plot provided by Architect.
3. Provide 25% spare lamps for each type of fixture specified
4. All stage lighting fixtures shall be UL or ETL listed.
2.14 ELLIPSOIDAL SPOTLIGHTS
A. General
1. The instrument shall be a Source Four ellipsoidal spotlight as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., Phoenix by Altman Stage lighting or Pacific by Philips/Strand
B. Physical
1. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be required for either lamp alignment or cleaning the reflector or lens
2. The following shall be provided: a. Integral cable clamp for power leads b. Positive locking of lamp focus and independent lamp alignment controls c. High impact, thermally insulated knobs and shutter handles d. Reflector secured with shock mounts e. Lens secured with silicone shock mounts f. Rotating shutter assembly - 50 rotation g. 20 gauge stainless steel shutters h. Insulated rear handle
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 32 OF 49
i. Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for smooth tube movement j. Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top mounted, quick release gel frame retainer k. Rugged 3/16” x 1-1/4” steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke l. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch m. Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris
C. Optical
1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with a precision molded borosilicate, ellipsoidal reflector and aspheric lens to produce an optimum cosine field.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: a. Molded borosilicate reflector with multiple dichroic layers b. 95% of visible light shall be reflected while 90% of infrared light as heat shall be transmitted through the reflector c. Low gate and beam temperature d. Sharp imaging through a three plane shutter design e. Projector-quality, high contrast aspheric lens, with an anti-reflective coating to increase transmission
D. Performance
1. The unit shall be precision engineered to use an HPL lamp to deliver an even, intense field with cosine distribution.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: a. 5, 10, 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree field angles b. Projector-quality pattern imaging c. Sharp shutter cuts without halation d. Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable e. Adjustable hard and soft beam edges
3. The unit shall be capable of utilizing ETC Dimmer Doubling technology
4. The unit shall be UL and cUL listed and so labeled.
E. Lamp
1. The high efficiency lamp shall be an HPL lamp, which shall consist of a compact tungsten filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope. The lamp shall
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 33 OF 49
mount axially within the reflector. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.
2.15 THEATRE FRESNEL
A. General
1. The instrument shall be a Pegasus – 8” LED Fresnel as manufactured by Altman Stage Lighting or 7” LED Fresnel by Desisti Lighting or 7” LED Arri Fresnel.
B. Physical 1. The fixture shall be an Altman Pegasus8-3K as manufactured by Altman Stage Lighting, or approved equal. Fixtures that do not meet the following performance criteria in this specification will not be acceptable 2. The fixture shall be an LED based variable zoom wash type luminaire with a true Fresnel type lens. 3. The fixture shall be an LED based variable zoom wash type luminaire with a true Fresnel type lens 4. Unit shall be IP20 rated for indoor use. 5. Push button controls and switches shall be located on the rear of the fixture for ease of control. 6. Ambient operating temperature of 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C). 7. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be included inside each unit. 8. The fixture shall be constructed primarily of sheet steel. 9. Finish shall be Epoxy Sandtex black, electrostatic application. Custom colors based on the RAL color system shall be available. 10. Fixture shall not weigh more than 14.2 lbs. (6.44kgs.) with hanging clamp and yoke included. 11. The fixture shall have an expected average power consumption of 140W maximum. 12. Fixtures shall have adjustable PWM frequency up to 20Khz to avoid flicker on camera. 13. A four door rotatable Barndoor accessory with spring loaded hinges is to be available, fitting securely into the front frame mount provided on the fixture body.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 34 OF 49
14. Fixture shall be supplied with:
a. Steel yoke constructed from rigid flat steel and with two mounting positions and indexed tilt angle markings.
b. Cast iron C-clamp (Altman #510) suitable for use on up to 2” O.D. pipe. Clamp shall incorporate a 360-degree rotational “Safety Stud” with locking bolt.
c. 18 inch safety cable.
d. Color frame.
e. 5 foot power cable with powerCON™ socket outlets and the following options for plug type: 1) powerCON™. 2) 2 pin + ground Stage Pin Male. 3) NEMA L5-20P Twist Lock Male.
15. Bare end cable.The fixture shall be ETL, cETL and CE LISTED, and shall be so labeled when delivered to site. The fixture shall be ETL LISTED under Portable Luminaires (UL Standard 1573) and Surface Mount Luminaires.
2.16 FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
A. GENERAL
1. Provide the following Stage Lighting Fixtures with C-Clamp, Male 20 amp Stage Pin plug installed, or 15 amp Nema 515 edison with a Power-con power input, black safety cable, and 575 watt 120 volt lamp or 15’ DMX cable.
2. Provide 15% spare lamps for each type of fixture specified
B. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING;
Stage Lighting Fixtures 8 ETC 436 36 ° Source 4 w/Clamp, Color Frame 8 2P&G Stage Pin plug installed 8 SC Safety Cable 10 HPL-575 575 watt Lamp 120 volt
1 ZOT7 Lycian Follow-spot model ZOT7 with lamp 1 700HR 700 single end fast fit lamp ( SPARE)
8 Peg8 6" Fresnel w/ color frame and safety cable 8 C-Clamp Mega C-Clamp 8 2P&G Stage Pin plug installed
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 35 OF 49
8 DMX-15 15 foot DMX jumper cable
12 1018 Par 1018 RGBW - LED wash fixture with 15' DMX cable 12 MAB Mega C-Clamp 12 SC Safety Cable 12 BD4 4-leaf Barn door 12 DMX-15 15 foot DMX jumper cable
Accessories 5' extension cable with male and female 2P&G connectors 6 5SO-2P&G installed 10' extension cable with male and female Edison connectors 10 7000E-10 installed 10' extension cable with male and female 2P&G connectors 2 10SO-2P&G installed 6 DMX-10 10' DMX jumper Cable 2 50116BA Orchestra String 12/3 – 6 outlets 1 Trick600 600 foot spool unwaxed tie line
3. Hang and focus the stage lighting fixtures according to light plot provided by the Architect. Attach safety cable to all fixtures.
Part 3. EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall deliver the lighting equipment and controls to the job site. Coordinate delivery with the General and Electrical Contractor.
B. All Equipment shall be stored in a clean, dry space.
C. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall furnish, deliver install and terminate all system control wires.
D. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall provide and install all system control devices.
E. The installation shall conform to the plans and specifications.
F. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall specifically coordinate the placement and sizes of conduit relating to work of this section and shall specifically review and approve the conduit rough-in.
G. If any conflicts or omissions occur as a result of the Theatrical Equipment Contractor’s unsuccessful coordination of the above mentioned work, it shall be the Theatrical Equipment Contractor’s responsibility to correct, provide and install any additional material that may be required.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 36 OF 49
H. Backbone or steel support other than what is shown on the plans shall be provided by the Theatrical Equipment Contractor.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SERVICES
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to receive and store the necessary materials and equipment for installation of the dimmer system. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the dimming system, even though every item may not be specifically mentioned.
B. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.
C. The electrical contractor shall install all lighting control and dimming equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s approved shop drawings.
D. All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the dimmer system load terminals.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Upon completion of the installation, including testing of load circuits, the contractor shall notify the dimming system manufacturer that the system is available for formal checkout.
B. Notification shall be provided in writing, two weeks prior to the time factory-trained personnel are needed on the job site.
C. No power is to be applied to the dimming system unless specifically authorized by written instructions from the manufacturer.
D. The purchaser shall be liable for any return visits by the factory engineer as a result of incomplete or incorrect wiring.
E. Upon completion of the formal check-out, the factory engineer shall demonstrate operation and maintenance of the system to the owner’s representatives. Training shall not exceed four working hours. Additional training shall be available upon request.
3.04 HOUSE LIGHT STATION PROGRAMMING
A. The stage lighting Contractor shall furnish two (2) separate four hour design and programming sessions with the End User to first determine the layout of the LCD master station and second to test and refine the station layout. 1. Basic LCD station layout shall mimic the two screen shots below and must be loaded into the LCD master station prior to the first discussion with the End User on station programming and needs.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 37 OF 49
2. The second Screen which may be accessed by a user authorization code shall include up to but not exceed; a. 48 virtual sliders b. 24 Preset scene selections c. Access to the color picker when and LED fixture is selected. d. 2 user profiles e. One lockout
3. If multiple LCD stations are part of the installation, then they must share or match configurations.
4. LCD stations programming can include control of up to, but not exceeding 12 DMX devices, these can include 1018 Pars, S4LED fixtures or Chroma-Q –RGBA – LED strips.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 38 OF 49
3.05 SYSTEM TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
A. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall furnish two (2) separate on site four hour training sessions in addition to the training provided by the Manufacturers service technician at the time of system turn-on. The first training session shall not take place until the Owner has taken possession of the building and prior to the grand opening of the facility. The first training session shall include; 3. A review of the lighting console operations 4. A review of the operation of the Dimming System control processor, and House lighting control processor. Trouble shooting tips and factory 800 service number procedures. 5. A review of the lighting system, explanation of the light plot and review of focus areas and DMX – out locations and operation. 6. How to maintain the stage lighting fixtures and change lamps.
B. The second training session shall be devoted to advanced console training and review house light control station operation and lock-out procedures. This session shall take place at the convenience of the Owner and be scheduled within 90 days of the first session.
C. Prepare four identical copies of Owners Manuals. Deliver two to the Owner and two to the Architect.
3.06 WARRANTY
A. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor in cooperation with the Manufacturers shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from date of delivery.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of such parts determined defective upon inspection. Replacement parts are to be furnished and installed by the Theatrical Equipment Contractor within three days.
C. Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident, negligence, alteration, abuse or misuse. Warranty does not cover any accessories or parts not supplied by the manufacturer.
D. Warranty shall not cover any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without manufacturer’s prior written authorization.
3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The following conditions must be met before final billing and final acceptance of the stage lighting and dimming system may be submitted.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 39 OF 49
1. Inventory of all equipment both fixed and portable verified by the Architect and Owner. 2. The Architect or his representative has signed off acceptance of the dimming system. 3. Satisfactory completion of all punch list items 4. Replacement of any burned out lamps observed at the time of final punch list review.
Part 4. PERFORMANCE AUDIO SYSTEM
4.01 GENERAL
A. This portion of specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the Performance Audio System. The General Conditions and the project drawings are considered to be parts of these specifications.
B. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the Performance Audio Systems, even though every item may not be specifically mentioned.
C. The Audio Systems Integrator shall provide all items necessary for a complete, safe, fully functional system as described herein, including all tools, scaffolding, labor, and supervision, even though they may not be specifically enumerated. Any errors, omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility, but must be included in the price and brought to the attention of the Owner for clarification.
D. Verify and existing conditions. Refer to the Owner for coordination and clarification before bid date of any discrepancies concerning existing conditions. Clarify with the Owner all locations including conduit and cable routings.
E. Furnish and install all low voltage wire and cable required for Performance Audio and Video system installation.
4.02 INSTALLATION
A. The Audio Systems Integrator shall deliver the Performance Audio equipment and controls to the job site. Coordinate delivery with the Owner.
B. All Equipment shall be stored in a clean, dry space.
C. The Audio Systems Integrator shall furnish, deliver and terminate all system control wires.
D. The installation shall conform to the plans and specifications.
E. The Audio Systems Integrator shall specifically coordinate the placement and sizes of conduit relating to work of this section and shall specifically review and approve the conduit rough-in.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 40 OF 49
4.03 PERFORMANCE AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT
A. The system shall provide the following functions: 1. Reinforcement of speech and music from wired microphone receptacles and wireless microphone systems to listeners in the auditorium. 2. Reinforcement of audio signal to listeners in the Auditorium through left and Right speakers and floor mounted subwoofer. 3. Manual mixing of sixteen (16) microphone receptacles and 4 wireless microphone systems (lavaliere and hand held), stereo DVD player and I-pod input jack. 4. Built-in ability to connect monitor speakers at stage level. 5. Hearing assistance using portable wireless FM receivers. 6. Production Intercom system, for cueing of technical personnel with wired headsets, locations throughout the Auditorium. 7. Furnish and Install Projection Screen and control. 8. Furnish and Install Projector and control on rolling cart.
B. Furnish and Install were specified and shown on the plans; the following equipment. See plans for rack layouts and riser.
1 Furman PL-8 Rack mounted surge with light System sequential switcher with mute relay tied to 1 Lowell SCS8R-ASM fire alarm system. 1 Dalite 40973 Single Motor low voltage control Projection screen 119” by 212” with extra black drop 1 Dalite 99780 as needed and mounting 2 Lowell RPC-1-20A-CD Remote power module 1 Mid-Atlantic SR-40-28 Floor mounted equipment rack with Swing door. 1 Mid-Atlantic LFD-40 Vented front door 2 Mid-Atlantic D4 4 Space Rack drawer, brushed finish 1 Mid-Atlantic Black Plates Lot of blank plates as required 4K Scaling Presentation Switcher with HDBaseT 1 Crestron DM-MD8X1-4K-C output 1 Crestron DMPS3-4K-300-C 3- Series 4K digitalmedia Presentation System 1 Crestron DM-TX-4K-100-C Wall Plate 4K digitalmedia 8G plus transmitter 1 Crestron FHD-DA2-4K-E 1 to 2 4K HDMI distribution Amplifier 3 Crestron TSW-1060-NC 10.1” Touch screen with Camera or Mic 1 Crestron TSW-1060-TTK Table top Kit for TSW, black smooth
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 41 OF 49
1 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-100-C 4K Digital Media Receiver 1 QSC Q-SYS-CORE 110F Flex Channel Digital Signal Processor 16-Port managed POE switch w/POE, Q-LAN/Dante 1 Netgear GS516TP approved, 1 lot Cable Equipment interconnection cables within racks 2 Proco MS82 Microphone splitter 16 channel 4 channel networking Amplifier 8000 watts per 1 QSC CXD4-5Q-NA channel 2 QSC AP5152 High Performance 15” Two way speakers 1 QSC AP212sw Sub-woofer 2 Allen Products SAS-100-WM Loud speaker Suspension & Aiming Arm 1 SHURE PMX-418C Goose neck Microphone with Podium mount. Premier III, Performance Assisted Listening 2 LISTEN LS-95-01 Complete System, with Charging Station
4 Rapco NJ-25 25’ microphone cable 2 Rapco AP-101 and 102 10” x 10” Stage plate, see drawings Rear Booth Console plug-in location with Av and 1 Custom AP103 clear-om inputs, see drawings 1 Custom Plate Remote Video Monitor plug-in plate 15’ Cable set consisting of one each; VGA, HDMI, Video, Audio to connect projector to Video plate back 2 Set Cables stage or in main booth. All wire shall be West Penn or Belden, no equal, low Lot Wire Various impedance speaker wire #227, microphone wire, #452, and Intercom wire # 430. Lot Wall Plates Custom Custom as required per drawings Lot Mid-Atlantic Various Blank plates as required to fill racks
4.04 ITEMS TO BE PURCHASED UNDER FF & E
A. The items listed below are not part of the Construction Contract but will be purchased by the University as a separate purchase at a later date, closer to completion. All infrastructure for these items, conduit, wire and back boxes are to be installed and labeled as part of this specification allowing all equipment to be plugged in when purchased. The Theater Equipment Contractor shall carry the labor to install and connect these items as shown in the plans as part of this specification.
B.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 42 OF 49
Bullet Camera for placement in booth, University to 1 Allow $900 specify model.
Back stage communication. 1 702 MS-702 Main Station - 2 channel 1 RK-1 Rack mount kit 4 701 RS -701 Belt pack 4 CC-300 CC-40 - single muff headset 4 C-25 25' jumper cables 3 pin. 2 KB-701 Dressing room station 1 In Equipment Rack 2 DN-500BD Denon Professional Rack mount BlueRay Player Professional Dual diversity Combo - Body pack 2 EW312G3-A transmitter 4 B3W4FF05B Countrymen B3-Omni Micro Lav. 2 EW312/345G3-A Professional Dual diversity Combo - Handheld 1 G3 Front Kit 4 Active Splitter Kit for 4 receivers. Audio Accessories 1 Shure SM58 - Dynamic Microphone 1 KM 199-3 3 section tripod mic stand 2 Director Whirlwind Passive Direct Box
2 K10.2 12" Powered stage Monitor Speakers 10 Mic-XX-25 2Mic cable 25 feet
1 SM810 Mic auto tuner and Conference mic mixer Projector Epson Laser Projector 1920 x 1200 resolution HD 1 Pro L1505 Projector, 8000 lumen 1 ELPLM07 Zoom Lens 4.6 - 7.4:1 Heavy duty cart for projector with Complete 15 1 LE48 interconnect cable set. 1 Submittals, Approval Dwgs./revisions/site coord./ Install 1 Proj. Mgt. Coord./close out Marshall presenter podium or other as specified by 1 MLR32 Owner
4.05 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION:
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 43 OF 49
A. The Audio Systems Integrator shall furnish two (2) four hour training session in addition to the training provided by the service technician at the time of system turn-on. The training session shall not take place until the Owner has taken possession of the building and prior to the opening of the facility. The first training session shall include;
7. A review of the Audio console operations, Instruction in operation of all microphone and dressing room paging equipment 8. A review of the operation of the Audio System control processor, trouble shooting tips and 800 service number procedures. 9. How to maintain the Audio system.
B. The second training session shall be devoted to advanced systems operation. This session shall take place at the convenience of the Owner and take place no later than 90 days after initial installation.
5.00 STAGE RIGGING AND CURTAINS
5.01 SCOPE
A. This portion of specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the stage rigging system. The form of contract, general conditions, and the project drawings are considered to be parts of these specifications.
B. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a complete, safe, fully functional system as described herein, including all tools, scaffolding, labor, and supervision, even though they may not be specifically enumerated. Any errors, omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility, but must be included in the price and brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification.
C. The work of this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Provide and install new dead hung pipes in locations shown on plans. 2. Provide and install curtain track in locations shown on plans. 3. Stage curtains, Furnish and install as specified. 4. Stage Dimming and Lighting from section 2 and 3.
D. Related work which is not included in this section:
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 44 OF 49
1. Other structural steel and miscellaneous metals not specifically called out as part of this section. 2. Galleries, ladders and catwalks. 3. Stage flooring. 4. Electrical connections, conduit, boxes and wiring of any type.
5.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Field Conditions: All bidders shall fully inform themselves of the conditions under which the work is to be performed. No additional compensation shall be allowed for any labor or item the bidder could have been fully informed of prior to the bid date
B. Safety: The systems shall conform to all applicable code requirements and shall be in conformance with industry standards of operation and practices. All materials, arrangements, and procedures shall comply with applicable code requirements, allowing the users to arrange and operate a safe assembly and working environment for audience and user personnel.
C. Insurance: the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall maintain injury and property liability insurance coverage throughout the project’s scheduled timetable, including workmen’s compensation coverage for Contractor’s employees. Limits from previous sections apply here.
5.03 SUBMISSIONS
A. Drawings: Submit component and installation drawings and schedules showing all information necessary to fully explain the design features, appearance, function, fabrication, installation, and use of system components in all phases of operation. They shall be approved by the Architect before beginning any fabrication, installation, or erection. Such approval does not relieve the Stage Lighting Contractor of the responsibility of providing equipment in accordance with the specifications.
B. Catalog Cuts: In lieu of drawings, the Contractor may submit catalog cuts for standard equipment items. These must contain full information on dimensions, construction and applications, to permit proper evaluation. In addition, they must be properly identified as to their intended use. Any options or variations must be clearly noted.
C. Schedule: Prior to the commencement of the installation work, the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall submit an outline of the proposed schedule and requirements for approval.
D. Instructions: Upon completion of the work, the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall submit 4 copies of a detailed Operating and Maintenance Manual including as-built shop drawings, equipment descriptions, and parts lists. The Stage Lighting Contractor shall go through the manual with personnel designated by the owner to demonstrate and explain the maintenance and operation of the systems. In addition provide one four (4) hour training session at the convenience of the Owner either 90 days from the date of completion or 30 days after the building is occupied by the teaching staff. This Option to be decided by the teaching staff and relayed through the architect.
5.04 WARRANTY
A. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall provide a two year written guarantee against defects in materials or workmanship starting from the date of acceptance of equipment by the
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 45 OF 49
Owner’s representative. The guarantee shall not cover damage due to normal wear and tear, acts of God, neglect, or improper use of equipment. Any required maintenance or replacement shall be provided by the Theatrical Equipment Contractor within thirty days of notification by the Owner except for safety related items, which shall be corrected within 48 hours of notification. Subsequent to the expiration of the guarantee period the Stage Lighting Contractor agrees to furnish repair and maintenance service, at the Owner’s expense, within thirty days of request for such service.
5.05 MANUFACTURERS
A. Due to the highly specialized nature of theatrical rigging equipment, and the safety requirements of the equipment, all equipment must be built by the following approved manufacturers:
J.R. Clancy, Inc. Stage Decoration & Supplies, Inc. 7041 Interstate Island Road 3519 Associate Drive Syracuse, New York 13209 Greensboro, NC 27405
Electronic Theater Controls Automatic Devices Company 3030 Laura Lane 2121 South 12th Street Middleton, WI 53562 Allentown, PA 18103
B. Other equipment manufacturers seeking acceptance must submit the following information at least 10 days prior to the bid opening date. Approval of manufacturers will be by addenda. Failure to submit any of the required information will automatically disqualify the manufacturers from consideration of approval. 1. Evidence that the manufacturer has been in business for a minimum of ten years manufacturing stage equipment. 2. A listing of 10 equivalent installations including: a. Name, address and telephone number of Owner; b. Name, address and telephone number of architect; c. Scope of work. 3. A brief written description of the manufacturer’s operation including facilities, financial capabilities, and experience of key personnel. 4. A statement from an insurance company indicating that the manufacturer carries a primary product and general liability insurance of $2,000,000 each, and excess liability of $10,000,000. 5. A product testing program, including determination of recommended working loads for products based on destructive testing by an independent laboratory and review by an independent licensed engineer. Manufacturers seeking approval must submit details of their test program and methods along with the names and telephone number of the independent test lab and independent licensed professional engineer performing the product testing and review.
5.06 GENERAL
A. Recommended Working Load: This specification calls for minimum recommended working loads for many hardware items. The manufacturer’s recommended working load is the maximum load which the manufacturer recommends be applied to properly installed,
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 46 OF 49
maintained, and operated new equipment. Manufacturer’s recommended working loads shall be determined by calculations by a Licensed Professional Engineer and destructive testing by an independent testing laboratory. These calculations and reports shall be available for review.
5.07 DEAD HUNG PIPE BATTENS: 1. All pipe battens shall consist of 1-1/2" inside diameter, schedule 40 pipe, in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. 2. All joints shall be spliced with 18" long sleeves with 9" extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8" hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint, use Part # number 015-67S 3. Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inches in length. 4. Pipe Battens shall be J.R. Clancy No. 015-67R, 48 feet long.
5.08 STAGE CURTAIN SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Description and Sizes: Curtains shall be as made in accordance with the following:
Description Qty Height Width Fullness Fabric Color
Main Traveler 2 21’-0” 24’-0” 50% Charisma Crimson Valance 1 5’-0” 42’-0” 50% Charisma Crimson Border 2 5’-0” 48’-0” 50% Crescent Black Legs 4 22’-0” 9’-0” 50% Crescent Black Rear Traveler 2 21’-0” 22’-6” 50% Crescent Black
B. Fabric Types
1. KM Fabrics “Marvel” Velour, 21 ounce cotton, Flame treated. Standard color as selected by owner’s representative. 2. Rose Brand Fabrics “Charisma” Synthetic matt Velour 26oz. IFR Heavy weight Trevira CS 3. KM Fabrics “Crescent” Synthetic Velour 20oz. IFR Medium weight brushed, Avora Polyester 4. Dazian’s, Seamless Muslin 100% cotton, Color Natural, Flame treated.
C. Cotton fabrics and other flammable fabrics must be chemically mill treated for flame retardancy according to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association’s NFPA #701.
D. See above for fullness of each curtain. 0% = Flat, no extra material. 50% - 100% = additional fabric to be included, exclusive of turnbacks and hems.
E. Seams between strips shall be single stitched without puckers using thread of matching color. All fabrics with a grain or pile shall have all strips running in the same direction.
F. Pleats shall be box type on 12" centers. Valances and borders are to have their pleats arranged to conceal the seams.
G. Top Finish shall be 3-1/2" heavy jute webbing double stitched to the top of the curtain with 1" of face fabric turned under the webbing.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 47 OF 49
1. Brass rustproof grommets shall be inserted in pleat centers (12" centers on flat curtains). Grommets shall be used as follows: #2 grommets - muslin, lightweight fabrics. #3 grommets - unlined velour, medium weight fabrics. #4 grommets - lined velour, heavy weight fabrics. 2. Track-mounted curtains shall be supplied with plated wire S-hooks or CCF-2 curtain to carrier snap hooks. Batten-mounted curtains are to be supplied with 36" braided #4 cotton tie lines. Tie lines shall be black or white to best match the curtains with the center line in alternate color to aid in hanging curtains.
H. Bottom Hems
1. Valances and borders shall have 4" bottom hems. 2. All full height curtains shall have 6" bottom hems complete with separate interior chain pockets filled with #8 plated jack chain. Chain pockets shall be stitched so that the chain will ride 2" above the finished bottom edge of the curtain. 3. Scrims, drops and cycloramas shall have an additional pipe pocket sewn to the back of the hem and shall be furnished with a 3/4" sch 40 steel, pipe batten, threaded and coupled every 10 feet.
I. Side Hems
1. House (Main) Curtain shall have 1/2 width of face fabric turned back at the leading edge. 2. All lined traveler curtains shall have 1/2 width of face fabric turned back at the leading edge. 3. All other side hems shall be 2".
5.09 TRAVELER TRACK
A. Stage Curtain Track
1. Track shall be of 14 gauge galvanized construction, entirely enclosed except for the slot in the bottom. Each section of track less than 20 feet shall be in one continuous piece. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section lengths over 20 feet. 2. Carriers shall be constructed of nylon, supported from two heavy-duty polyethylene wheels held in the ball bearing by a nickel-plated steel rivet. Each carrier shall be equipped with a free-moving swivel and sufficient trim chain to accommodate a curtain S-hook. Each carrier shall have a back-pack. Rubber washers shall be provided between each back- pack and carrier to reduce noise. 3. The Master Carrier block shall be constructed of plated steel having two cable clips to clamp the cord to the carrier. Four wheels in pairs identical to the single carrier above shall support the block. 4. Live and dead end pulleys shall be adjustable, equipped with oil-impregnated sleeve bearing wheels on adequately guarded plated steel housings. End stops at each track end and one adjustable, demountable floor pulley shall be furnished. Stretch-resistant, fiberglass center operating cord shall be 3/8" in diameter. 5. Two (2) tracks shall be rigged for bi-parting operation with a 24" center overlap. Hanging clamps will be provided for suspension at six foot maximum intervals. 6. Track assembly shall be Automatic Devices Company Silent Steel Model # 280 track- 42 ft. in length. 7. Provide a complete traveler track assembly where indicated on the line set schedule and on the drawings.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 48 OF 49
6.00 EXECUTION
6.01 INSTALLATION
A. The Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and equipment during the period of the installation.
B. All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained superintendents and workmen. Equipment shall be installed in a workman like manner, per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
C. Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
D. Mule blocks, cable rollers and guides shall be installed, as required, to provide proper alignment, to maintain specified fleet angles, and to prevent contact with other surfaces.
E. All equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure.
F. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes. 2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to match the original.
6.02 CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
6.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. During the installation of equipment the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall arrange for access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Stage Lighting Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to be made by other authorities.
C. Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time of inspection, the Theatrical Equipment Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re-scheduled under the same conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing and scaffolding shall be removed to permit full
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 26 55 61 STAGE LIGHTING, RIGGING AND AUDIO VISUAL PAGE 49 OF 49
operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating condition in every particular.
END OF SECTION
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 – CMR Shafer Hall Renovation Addendum #4 – March 27. 2018
SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 1 OF 7
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Attention is directed to the AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and Exhibits and all Sections within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this section of the specifications.
B. This section is intended to supplement the requirements of Division 01 requirements. For any conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels between this Section and Division 01, comply with the most stringent requirement.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes ring-down emergency phones, data transmission wiring, raceway and associated hardware.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IP: Internet protocol.
B. LAN: Local area network.
C. PoE: Power over Ethernet.
D. PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.
E. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.
F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Ring-down emergency telephones shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For Ring-down emergency telephones. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 2 OF 7
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For Ring-down emergency telephones, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Ring-down emergency telephones to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:
1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. 3. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non- temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures. 4. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250,
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 3 OF 7
winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick. Use NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures. 5. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70. 6. Corrosive Environment: System components subject to corrosive fumes, vapors, and wind-driven salt spray in coastal zones. Use NEMA 250, Type 6P enclosures. 7. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control- station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years minimum from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY (BLUE) TELEPHONES
A. Base:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Code Blue Corporation “CB 1-s” tower unit / “CB 2-s” wall unit or comparable product: 2. Description:
a. The unit shall be a vandal-resistant communications device that is a multi- functional, freestanding pedestal constructed of carbon steel, model “CB” series from Code Blue Corporation. It shall include a high quality, hands-free communications device illuminated by a high intensity faceplate light, with a second faceplate available for multiple uses. It also shall be illuminated by a powerful combination blue beacon strobe and an area light that serve to easily identify it from a distance. b. Provide mount for camera in paragraph below.
3. Construction:
a. The unit shall be a cylinder constructed of ASTM A500 seamless carbon steel structural tube, schedule 20, 12.75" outside diameter x 0.25" thick wall, at a height of 108" and weigh approximately 375 lbs. b. The unit shall have an internal anchor base plate that is MIG welded 2" above the base and fabricated with a minimum of 0.50" thick A-36 grade steel plate. It shall have a 5" diameter center hole for electrical conduit access. The base plate shall have four oblong holes on an 8" circular bolt pattern for attachment. c. An access door measuring 14" H x 9.64" W will be placed 10.94" from the bottom of the base to provide access for mounting to the anchor bolts and
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 4 OF 7
connectivity to electrical facilities. The opening shall have a cover plate, which mounts flush and is same steel and radius as the unit. The cover plate shall fit into the opening and have a weather-resistant gasket. The cover plate shall be held in place by two ¼-20 x 1" counter sunk proprietary fasteners. d. Tamper resistant proprietary fasteners manufactured for Code Blue Corporation shall be used. It shall not be possible to acquire the custom designed bit from any other source. e. Two area light openings 10" high and 17" wide with 153 degrees of arc each shall be cut opposite each other, with the bottom of the openings approximately 14" from the top. f. A heavy cylindrical lens made of clear UV rated polycarbonate shall be inserted behind the openings and be mechanically and chemically fastened to the interior. The lens shall be fully sealed and treated to prevent damage from ultra-violet radiation, aging, cracking, yellowing or breaking. g. A recessed opening shall be cut at a point beginning 36.6" above the bottom of the unit. The opening shall be 27.5" tall at the forward edge and 25.2" tall at the rear edge, creating a 25-degree angle from the horizontal and an arc of 160 degrees in the face. h. The opening shall be enclosed by a 7 gauge steel plate with a dual opening for a communication device and an additional faceplate available for directory listings, camera, card reader or other mounted device.
B. Phone:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Code Blue Corporation “FP1” or comparable product 2. Description:
a. Analog. b. Single Button c. Two LED status indicator lights d. Operating temperature -40 deg F to 185 deg F e. Power: 120V / 12V AC/DC f. Flush Mounting
C. Ring Down Emergency Phone Camera:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Verint V4320FDW-DN or comparable product. 2. Description:
a. Image Sensor: Progressive b. Lens: Varifocal c. Minimum Illumination: Color: 0.1 lux @ F1.2, B/W: 0.001 lux @ F1.2 d. Video Compression: H.264 e. Resolution: 1080p f. Frame Rate: 30 fps g. Protocol: IPv4/v6, TCP/IP, UDP, RTP, RTSP, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, PPPoE, UPnP, IGMP, SNMP, IEEE 802.1x, QoS, ONVIF Profile-S h. Security: Password Protection, HTTPS, IP Filtering, 802.1X i. Power: Class 3 PoE or 12VDC or 24VDC
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 5 OF 7
D. UTP Cable:
1. Requirements: Comply with requirements for UTP cable in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling and OSP, gel-filled, water-repellent core cable for the site emergency blue-phone.
E. UTP Cable Hardware
1. Requirements: Comply with requirements for UTP cable hardware in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
F. Fiber Cable:
1. Requirements: Comply with requirements for Fiber cable in Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling” and OSP, Multi-Mode, 6 multi-fiber, OM3 loose tube, indoor/outdoor, all-dielectric, gel-free optical fiber cable for the site emergency blue-phone over 295’-0”.
G. Transceivers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Comnet. b. Signamax.
2. Transceivers Media Converter
a. Features
1) Supports 30W IEEE 802.at PoE+ and 15.4W IEEE 802.af PoE standards 2) 10/100/1000 BaseT/TX 3) 1000Base SFP fiber module 4) Operating temperature -40 deg F to 176 deg F
b. Power Supply c. SFP Transceiver Module:
1) Features
a) Compliant with: SFP MultiSource Agreement, IEEE802.3Z b) Hot-pluggable capability c) 1000BaseSX duplex LC connector d) Operating temperature -40 deg F to 185 deg F
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 6 OF 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Refer to C-201 for locations and further information. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 MOUNTING
A. Concrete base foundation: by others. Coordinate Anchor bolts and templates with Base Installer.
B. The unit shall be mounted onto the anchor bolts that are set .50" above the concrete. Standard 0.75" x 24" galvanized steel anchor bolts, nuts and washers.
3.3 WIRING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. 2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. 3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
E. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" and Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
F. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 27 32 26 RING-DOWN EMERGENCY TELEPHONES PAGE 7 OF 7
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. 3. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and adjust back-focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.
B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance equipment.
END OF SECTION 27 32 26 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 CB 1-S SIGNATURE HELP POINT®
Product Description The CB 1-s is our most-popular pedestal Help Point. Popular Highlighted by a high intensity area light that provides added Open visibility, this blue light emergency tower provides direct Applications Spaces contact with first responders and is an excellent choice for walkways, parking lots, open campus areas and more. Standard Features Durable quarter-inch steel construction Entry Points Trademarked cylindrical design Infrastructure 9 feet tall 12.75” diameter LED faceplate light
Popular Upgrades
Public Address Overhead Camera Dual Faceplates Mount
Mounting Rings AED Housing
Get It Customized
We know your installation is unique. From paint and graphics to height and mountings, if you dream it, we can make it. Contact Customer Service at [email protected] or 800-205-7186 to learn more.
© 2016 Code Blue Corporation page 1 of 2 CPS-103-L Technical Features Specifications Communication Style • Height: 9’ (274.32 cm) • Speakerphone Options • Standard colors: British Racing • Weight: 330 lbs. (149.69 kg) ○○ IP5000: Full duplex, SIP Green, Cardinal Red, Dark • Diameter: 12.75” (32.38 cm) compatible VoIP phone. Bronze, Gloss White, Gloss • Material & thickness: 0.25” Black, Medium Bronze, Midnight ○○ IA4100: Analog full duplex steel phone. Blue, Safety Blue, Safety Red, • Access door: 14” x 9.64” Safety Yellow, Tiger Orange, • Hardwire (35.56 x 24.49 cm) Bright Silver • Cellular • Graphics text: Assistance, Power • IP wireless Courtesy, Emergency, Police, • Standard: 12-24V AC/DC Security, Information, Help Point • Optional: 120, 240, 277, Lighting • LED faceplate light • Graphics colors: Black, Blue, 347V AC • Beacon/strobe Green, Red, White, Yellow ○○ Hardwire • Area light Compliance ○○ NightCharge® • UL 2017 ○○ PoE • UL 60950-1 • IP56 • NEMA 4 • ADA Options 90° 90°TYP. TYP. 10.00 10.00 • Public address speakers R.50 R.50 SPACINGSPACING • Overhead camera mount • Temperature-controlled AED 7.92 7.92 housing 12.75 12.75 • Mounting ring 5.00 5.00 36.13 36.13 • Dual faceplates 1.11 1.11
BASEBASE PLATE PLATE DETAIL DETAIL Mounting SchematicsSCALESCALE 1:8 1:8 5.13 5.13
108.00 108.00 101.75 101.75 90° TYP. 10.00 12.60 12.60 R.50 SPACING
7.92 12.75
39.15 39.15 14.00 14.00 5.00 36.13 1.11
11.00 11.00 BOTTOM VIEW BASE PLATE DETAIL 9.64 9.64 SCALE 1:8 BASEBASE PLATE PLATE 2.00 2.00 5.13 SIDESIDE VIEW VIEW FRONTFRONT VIEW VIEW
108.00 101.75 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice or obligation on the part of Code Blue Corporation. 12.60
© 2016 Code Blue Corporation page 2 of 2 CPS-103-L
39.15 14.00
11.00
9.64 BASE PLATE 2.00 SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 18
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator tran 10. Radio Master Box with Antenna 11. Tie into the Eastern Connecticut State University fire alarm system and graphic annunciator.
a. Provide a full graphic update to the main Eastern Connecticut State University campus supervising station utilizing project As-Builts. Simplex to provide a preliminary and final update to the central station incorporating owner comments and field operational adjustments. Manufacturer to provide two additional post occupancy on site field visits to make adjustments to the fire alarm control matrix, etc., in order to fine tune the operation for the owner site specific needs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.
1. Interface with existing fire alarm system.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 2 OF 18
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 5. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 6. System riser diagram with all device types and cable and wire types and sizes. 7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code. 8. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 9. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
C. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 3 OF 18
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following:
1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following:
a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.
5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Addressable Interface Devices: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Three of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel licenses by the City and/or State.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 4 OF 18
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Source must be an authorized distributor of the specified manufacturer and authorized to sell in project area.
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
1.13 ADDITIONAL SCOPE TO BE INCLUDED IN BASE CONTRACT
A. Furnish, install, wire (with 50 ft. of approved wiring and conduit), terminate and program the following in addition to those indicated on the drawings or implied in the control sequence:
1. Smoke Detector with Base: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than two units. 2. Combination Audio/Visual Notification Appliance: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than five units. 3. Visual Notification Appliance: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than ten units. 4. Manual Fire Alarm Box: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than two units. 5. Addressable Interface Devices: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than ten units. 6. Speaker: Quantity equal to 5 percent of units installed, but not less than ten units.
B. If units are not utilized before substantial completion of Project, then at the Owner’s option, either turn units over to Owner or provide credit to Owner for deletion of material and labor.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 5 OF 18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Simplex or comparable product by one of the following:
1. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company; 4100U.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 7. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit. 8. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 9. Fire standpipe system.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts/HVAC units of designated air-conditioning duct systems serving zone where alarm was initiated. 9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Activate emergency lighting control in assembly spaces. 11. Record events in the system memory. 12. Open smoke dampers in elevator shafts under smoke detector alarm condition in elevator lobbies. 13. Deactivate sound systems located in assembly spaces. Provide relays to interrupt power supply to each head-end system.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 4. Fire pump running. 5. Fire-pump loss of power. 6. Fire-pump power phase reversal. 7. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems. 8. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 9. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 6 OF 18
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
a. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. b. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6. c. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 7 OF 18
d. System Layout: Load each signaling line circuit to no more than 80 percent of its capability.
2. Serial Interfaces: One RS-232 port per annunciator.
D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector. 3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, comply with ANSI S3.41.
F. Elevator Recall:
1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall with signal sent to elevator controller. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.
a. Elevator lobby detectors other than at the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.
2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor. 3. A field-mounted relay actuated by the smoke detector or the fire alarm control unit signals the elevator controller and operates building notification appliances and annunciator. 4. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
G. Elevator Controls: Heat detector operation shuts down elevator power by operating a shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the heat detector or the fire alarm control unit closes the shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator.
H. HVAC Controls: Auto/off switch located in FACP allows for manual control of each air distribution unit 2,000 cfm and over in size.
I. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
J. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 8 OF 18
K. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
L. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center or other remote location designated by the fire marshal.
1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination. b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.
2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones. 3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.
M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power- supply module rating. 2. Power supply shall be from a circuit breaker with locking clip located in an emergency panelboard located as close to main service as possible.
N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated lead acid. Sized based upon all strobes set at 75 cd. 2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72. Minimum 60 hours of standby, followed by 10 minutes of alarm. 3. Loads Not Served by Battery: Magnetic door handlers and smoke dampers.
O. Surge Protection:
1. Install surge protection normal AC power for the FACP and its accessories. Comply with Section 264313 "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" for auxiliary panel suppressors. 2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the FACP.
P. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 9 OF 18
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
Q. Smoke Damper Supervision: Visible signal indication at fire alarm control unit to reflect open and closed position of dampers associated with smoke control system only. Provide multiple local addressable interface devices for each damper for control open and close and monitoring open and close independently. Provide appropriate UL relays and contactors for interface.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery- powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Provide where appropriate. Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 3. Provide combination of smoke detector with carbon monoxide detector wherever indicated on electrical plans. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm system control panel. 4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indictor and test station where noted or indicated. 6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.
a. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 10 OF 18
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:
a. Integral Addressable Module: Arrange to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 10 ft. according to UL 464. c. Heat sensor, combination rate of rise and fixed temperature.
C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Low Velocity Detectors: Design as recommended by manufacturer for the specific air velocity and installation conditions where applied. 7. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit or smoke damper control.
2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B. Provide combination of heat detector with carbon monoxide detector whenever indicated on electrical plans. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm control panel.
C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting or Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 11 OF 18
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting or twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases depending on location. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.
2.8 MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS
A. Provide combination of smoke detector with carbon monoxide detector wherever indicated on electrical plans. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm system control panel.
B. Provide combination of heat detector with carbon monoxide detector whenever indicated on electrical plans. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm control panels.
C. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting or twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke- detector bases.
D. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
E. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating for existing conditions.
F. Test button tests all sensors in the detector.
G. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:
1. Primary status. 2. Device type. 3. Present sensitivity selected. 4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 12 OF 18
H. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke sensor, a carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor.
1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke Detectors" Article. 2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors" Article. 3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article. 4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector type.
2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. Color to be selected by Architect; on renovation projects, match color of existing devices.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.
B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75 field adjustable cd (batteries based upon 75 cd). b. 110/135/177 cd, field adjustable.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units whenever more than two units are visible in any space. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:
1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1/8 to 2 W. 4. Mounting: Flush, semirecessed or surface mounted and bidirectional. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.
2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or 120-V ac. See plans.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 13 OF 18
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush or surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1 (flush where possible).
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller, motor controllers, dampers, circuit-breaker shunt trip, or other devices.
2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire- alarm control unit and automatically capture one or two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 14 OF 18
7. Communication bus failure.
E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
2.14 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER
A. Transmitter shall comply with NFPA 1221 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Comply with 47 CFR 90.
C. Description: Manufacturer's standard commercial product; factory assembled, wired, tested, and ready for installation and operation.
1. Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper- resistant flush tumbler lock. 2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner. 3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac. 4. Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity; submit calculations. 5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point impedance matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure. 6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance. 7. Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof. 8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to the transmitter, matching fire-alarm and other system outputs to message-generating inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions.
D. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire- alarm control unit or from its own internal sensors or controls and shall automatically transmit signal along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. Transmitted messages shall correspond to standard designations for fire- reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and shall include separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions:
1. Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated value. 2. System Test Message: Initiated manually by a test switch within the transmitter cabinet, or automatically at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours, with transmission time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls. 3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of the transmitter normal power source, derangement of the wiring of the transmitter, or any alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it. 4. Local Fire-Alarm-System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble signal to be indicated on the building system. 5. Local Fire-Alarm-System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm state. Identifies device that initiated the alarm.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 15 OF 18
6. Local Fire-Alarm-System Supervisory-Alarm Message: Actuated when the building alarm system indicates a supervisory alarm.
2.15 DEVICE GUARDS
A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.
1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Luminaires: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a luminaire.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Install remote test switch and indicating light in location as directed in field. Coordinate installation with Division 23. Provide a permanent placard to clearly identify location of detector per NFPA 72. Provide one low velocity detector per each 36-inch width of transfer ducts. Locate test switch in same space as smoke detector.
E. Transfer Duct and Plenum In-Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72. Provide low velocity in-duct smoke detectors within transfer ducts and duct plenums. For transfer ducts up to 36 inches in width, provide one detector. For ducts up to 72 inches in width, provide two detectors at quarter points of the duct. For ducts greater than 72 inches in width, provide detectors 24 inches on center. Provide a permanent placard to clearly identify location of detector per NFPA 72. Provide one low velocity detector per each 36 inches in width of transfer ducts. Locate test switch in same space as smoke damper.
F. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 16 OF 18
G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling or 80 inches above finished floor, whichever is lower. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bottom of strobe not less than 6 inches below the ceiling or 80 inches above finished floor, whichever is lower. Install devices not less than 24 inches below the ceiling in sleeping rooms.
J. Provide adjustable 4 watt speakers and 177 candela strobes for all mechanical, electrical, and equipment rooms with noise producing machines.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Install top of box at 48 inches above finished floor.
M. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: [Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
N. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
O. Program central graphic annunciation station to reflect all building backgrounds in this project including all devices and addresses, and connect to and provide fiber network connections for campus fire alarm network.
P. The detectors shall be connected as a separate zone or zones to the fire alarm signaling system, but shall only activate a supervisory signal at the main control unit and any remote annunciators. The CO detection shall not activate the building evacuation alarm.
Q. Any room containing fuel-burning heating equipment and CO detection shall be provided with a sign at all entrances to the space indicating that CO detectors are located inside the space.
R. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind load with a gust factor of 1.3 without damage.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 17 OF 18
1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 2. Smoke dampers in elevator shafts. 3. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning designated equipment controls. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate fire extinguishing system operation. 6. Provide appropriate UL relays and auxiliary contacts to interface with mechanical equipment locally. 7. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 8. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 9. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 10. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
C. Coordinate all features of fire alarm devices with HVAC systems, including interface with HVAC control systems, power and control wiring requirements. See Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" and HVAC control sections for requirements and sequence of operations.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect/Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Proper planning and scheduling (five days) is required.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Provide field adjusted settings for each individual speaker and strobe throughout each space for proper and appropriate NFPA coverage.
D. Provide additional factory-authorized technician site visits and field programming during field testing and twice for post occupancy programming adjustments and testing for Owner-initiated changes and tailoring to actual conditions during the first six months.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PAGE 18 OF 18
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
F. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.
G. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
H. Prepare test and inspection reports.
I. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
J. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
K. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
L. Provide two site visits for post occupancy follow-up programming to fine tune sensitive, audio, visual, and any follow-up programming required within first year.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. As a minimum and in addition to the requirements of other sections, provide two (2) 8-hour days of owner training sessions in addition to multiple start-up visits to properly support the contractor.
END OF SECTION 28 31 11 03/27/2018 – Addendum 4
Eastern Connecticut State University PROJECT NO.: CF-RW-330 - CMR Shafer Hall Renovation ADDENDUM 4 - MARCH 27, 2018